IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader 

Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Machine Type 3572

GC27-2212-02
IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader 

Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Machine Type 3572

GC27-2212-02
 Note:
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information in Notices located in the
back of this publication.

To ensure that you have the latest publications, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/lto.

This edition applies to the IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide,
GC27-2212-02, and to the subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions.
© Copyright IBM Corporation 2008, 2011.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
 Read this First
Connecting the Product
| This product is not intended to be connected directly or indirectly, by any means
| whatsoever, to interfaces or public telecommunications networks.

Accessing Online Technical Support

For online Technical Support for your library, visit: http://www.ibm.com/support/

| Registering for Support Notification

| Support Notification registration provides e-mail notification when new firmware
| levels have been updated and are available for download and installation.

| To register for Support Notification, visit the web at: http://www-01.ibm.com/

| software/support/einfo.html

| Note: Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together.
| When updating to the latest firmware, verify that all installed components
| such as the tape drive and library are at the latest levels noted on the
| Support web site. Mixing different levels of library and tape drive firmware
| is not supported and may cause unpredictable results.
|
Sending Us Your Comments
Your feedback is important in helping IBM® provide accurate and useful
information. If you have comments or suggestions for improving this publication,
send your comments by:
v E-mailing IBM:
– Internet or IBMLink from US: [email protected]
– IBMLink from Canada: STARPUBS at TORIBM
Include the following information in your e-mail:
- Exact publication title
- Form number (for example, GA32-1234-02) or part number (located on the
back cover of the publication)
- Page number to which you are referring
v Using the Readers’ Comments form at the back of this publication
v Mailing your comments to:
International Business Machines Corporation
Information Development
Department GZW
9000 South Rita Road
Tucson, AZ 85744-0001 USA

Contacting IBM Technical Support

In the USA: Call 1-800-IBM_SERV (1-800-426-7378).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 iii

 Before calling, complete all the steps in “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on
page 7-2.

In all other countries and regions: Visit

http://www.ibm.com

and complete all the steps in “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

To open a Service Request online: Under Support & downloads, click on Open a
service request.

| Summary of Changes
| The following information has been added to the GC27-2212-02 edition:
| v New TS2900 Library (Machine Type 3572, Model S5H). Model S5H contains one
| IBM Ultrium 5 Half-High Tape Drive:
| – 6 Gb/s SAS - single port
| – Supports Ultrium 5 media:
| - 1500 GB data capacity
| - 3000 GB data capacity with 2:1 compression
| v New Generation 4 Model S4H Tape Drive (ULT3580-HH4 V2)
| – 6.0 Gb/s SAS - single port
| – 120 MB/s sustained native data transfer rate

iv IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Contents
Read this First. . . . . . . . . . . . iii Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Connecting the Product . . . . . . . . . . iii Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Accessing Online Technical Support . . . . . . iii Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
| Registering for Support Notification . . . . . . iii Web User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Sending Us Your Comments . . . . . . . . . iii Logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Contacting IBM Technical Support . . . . . . . iii Common Header Elements . . . . . . . . 2-6
| Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . iv Menus Available from the Web User Interface 2-6
User Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Chapter 3. Installation and
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Verifying the Shipment . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Choosing a Location . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Safety and Environmental Notices . . xiii
Installing the Deskside Cover . . . . . . . . 3-2
Danger Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Installing in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Caution Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Removing the Accessor Locking Screw . . . . 3-12
Laser Safety and Compliance . . . . . . . . xiv
Attaching the Library to a Server . . . . . . 3-13
Class I Laser Product . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Connecting the Host Interface Cables . . . . 3-13
Performing the Safety Inspection Procedure . . . xiv
Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . 3-14
Rack Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Configuring the Library . . . . . . . . . 3-15
| Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Configuring Your Library using the Web User
| Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
| for NEBS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Logging in to the Web User Interface . . . . 3-17
| NEBS Compliance Statements . . . . . . . xvii
Checking Firmware Level . . . . . . . . 3-19
Product Recycling and Disposal . . . . . . . xviii
Configuring Library Settings . . . . . . . 3-19
Configuring Network Settings . . . . . . 3-21
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi Configuring Date and Time Settings . . . . 3-22
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . xxi Configuring Encryption Settings . . . . . . 3-24
Configuring E-mail Notifications. . . . . . 3-26
Chapter 1. Product Description . . . . 1-1 Configuring Trap Notifications . . . . . . 3-27
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Managing User Access . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Cartridge Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Saving the Library Configuration . . . . . 3-30
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Configuring Your Library using the Operator
Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
SAS Host Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Logging in to the Operator Panel . . . . . 3-31
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Configuring Network Settings . . . . . . 3-31
Supported Internet Protocols . . . . . . . . 1-7 Configuring Library Settings . . . . . . . 3-32
| Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Populating the Library with Cartridges . . . . 3-34
| Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Verifying Library and Drive Operation . . . . 3-35
SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Taking the Library Online . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Network Time Protocol (NTP) . . . . . . . . 1-8 Registering for Support Notification . . . . . 3-36
Ultrium Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Speed Matching . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Chapter 4. Operations . . . . . . . . 4-1
Channel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Monitoring the Library . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Managing the Library. . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning . . . . . 1-9 Configuring the Library . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Location Coordinates and Element Addresses . . . 1-9 Servicing the Library . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Library Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Using the Web User Interface . . . . . . . . 4-15
Product Environment . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Monitoring the Library . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Supported Servers, Operating Systems, and Managing the Library . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Configuring the Library . . . . . . . . 4-21
Supported Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Servicing the Library . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Chapter 2. User Interfaces . . . . . . 2-1 Chapter 5. Media . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 v
 Data Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Applying a RID Tag to a Library . . . . . . 8-18
Cartridge Compatibility . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Capacity Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Chapter 9. Parts List . . . . . . . . 9-1
| Write Once, Read Many (WORM). . . . . . . 5-3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
WORM Media . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) . . . . . . 9-1
Data Security on WORM Media . . . . . . 5-4 Power Cords and Receptacles . . . . . . . . 9-2
WORM Media Errors . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
| Requirements for WORM Capability . . . . . 5-4
Appendix A. Information for Trained
Cleaning Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Cartridge Memory Chip (LTO-CM) . . . . . . 5-5 IBM Service Personnel . . . . . . . A-1
Bar Code Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Web User Interface Service Login . . . . . . A-1
Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels . . . . 5-7 Logging in to the Web User Interface . . . . A-1
Write-Protect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Common Header Elements . . . . . . . . A-3
Cartridge Care and Handling . . . . . . . . 5-8 Menus Available from the Web User Interface A-3
Provide Training . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 User Privilege Comparison . . . . . . . . A-3
Ensure Proper Packaging . . . . . . . . 5-8 Connecting to the Library using the Telnet Service
Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Drive or Cartridge Removal . . . . . . . . A-5
Perform a Thorough Inspection . . . . . . 5-10 Removing or Reinstalling the Library Chassis
Handle the Cartridge Carefully . . . . . . 5-11 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Examples of Cartridge Problems . . . . . . 5-11 Removing the Tape Drive from the Library . . A-9
Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin . . . 5-11 Reinstalling the Tape Drive in the Library . . A-11
Repositioning a Leader Pin . . . . . . . 5-12 Manually Removing a Tape Cartridge from the
Reattaching a Leader Pin . . . . . . . . 5-13 Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Removing a Stuck Cartridge Magazine . . . A-21
Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Disposing of Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . 5-18 Appendix B. Error Codes . . . . . . B-1
Ordering Media Supplies . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Library Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Ordering Bar Code Labels . . . . . . . . 5-22 Drive Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Web User Interface Error Messages . . . . . . B-11
Chapter 6. Troubleshooting . . . . . 6-1 Trap Definitions (Types) . . . . . . . . . B-13
How the Library Reports Problems . . . . . . 6-1
Library Error Message Content . . . . . . . 6-2 Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags . . . . . C-1
Diagnosing a Problem . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library . . . . C-1
Isolating Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape
Isolating Library Power Problems. . . . . . 6-7 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Isolating Drive Problems. . . . . . . . . 6-7
Isolating Web User Interface Problems . . . . 6-8 Appendix D. Sense Data . . . . . . . D-1
Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems 6-8 Sense Key Definitions . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Installation and Configuration Problems . . . . 6-9 Library Sense Data . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Interpreting Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . 6-10 Tape Drive Sense Data . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Reseating Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
E-mailing Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the
Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Chapter 7. Service Procedures . . . . 7-1
Obtaining Error Information From an IBM System
Using the IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) 7-1
p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Contacting IBM Technical Support . . . . . . 7-2
SCSI Sense Data Definition . . . . . . . . E-2
SCSI Sense Data - Library Error . . . . . . E-2
Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement SCSI Sense Data - Tape Drive Error . . . . . E-3
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Retrieving from a Sun System . . . . . . . . E-4
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Retrieving from an HP-UX System . . . . . . E-5
Replacing a Defective Cartridge Magazine . . . . 8-1 Retrieving From an IBM System i with RISC
Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually . . . 8-1 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Moving the Library from a Rack to a Desktop . . 8-2
Removing Library from a Rack . . . . . . 8-2 Appendix F. Library Configuration
Installing the Library on a Desktop . . . . . 8-5 Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Moving the Library from a Desktop to a Rack . . 8-8
Physical Library . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Removing Library from a Desktop . . . . . 8-8
Logical Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Installing the Library in a Rack . . . . . . 8-10
Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Replacing the Library . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

vi IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| Encryption Settings (S5H and S4H only) . . . . F-2 People's Republic of China Class A Electronic
Library and Drive Firmware . . . . . . . . F-3 Emission Statement . . . . . . . . . . H-3
Users Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement H-3
| Support Notification . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4
Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance
Keyboard Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . G-1 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 Avis de conformité à la réglementation
Navigating by keyboard. . . . . . . . . G-1 d'Industrie Canada . . . . . . . . . . H-4
Accessing the publications . . . . . . . . G-1 Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4
Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement H-5
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
Electronic Emission Notices . . . . . . . . H-2 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . H-2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
European Union (EU) Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . H-3

Contents vii
viii IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Figures
1-1. TS2900 Tape Autoloader . . . . . . . 1-1 4-2. Configuration settings . . . . . . . . 4-3
1-2. Front panel components . . . . . . . 1-2 4-3. Current information . . . . . . . . . 4-3
1-3. Cartridge magazine . . . . . . . . . 1-4 4-4. Hardware attributes . . . . . . . . . 4-4
1-4. Cartridge magazine (top view) . . . . . 1-4 4-5. Unlock I/O Station command . . . . . 4-4
1-5. Rear panel components. . . . . . . . 1-5 4-6. I/O Station unlocked . . . . . . . . 4-4
1-6. Ultrium Half-High Tape Drive . . . . . 1-8 4-7. Unlock Magazine command . . . . . . 4-5
1-7. Location coordinates . . . . . . . . 1-10 4-8. Move Cartridge command. . . . . . . 4-5
2-1. Operator Panel components . . . . . . 2-1 4-9. Unload command . . . . . . . . . 4-6
2-2. Library ready screen . . . . . . . . 2-4 4-10. Clean Drive command . . . . . . . . 4-6
2-3. Password entry screen . . . . . . . . 2-4 4-11. Inventory command . . . . . . . . . 4-6
2-4. Screen elements . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 4-12. Online/Offline command . . . . . . . 4-7
2-5. Confirmation screen . . . . . . . . . 2-5 4-13. Move to Ship Position command . . . . 4-7
2-6. Java security warning message . . . . . 2-5 4-14. Reboot Drive command . . . . . . . 4-8
2-7. Login window . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 4-15. Reboot Library command . . . . . . . 4-8
2-8. User account window . . . . . . . . 2-7 4-16. Logout command . . . . . . . . . 4-8
2-9. Superuser account window . . . . . . 2-7 4-17. Auto Cleaning settings . . . . . . . . 4-8
2-10. Administrator account window . . . . . 2-8 4-18. Active slot count settings . . . . . . . 4-9
3-1. Attaching side rails to the library chassis 3-4 4-19. Library access mode settings . . . . . . 4-9
3-2. Attaching the desktop feet . . . . . . 3-4 4-20. Date and Time settings . . . . . . . 4-10
3-3. Attaching the cover to the library chassis 4-21. Network settings . . . . . . . . . 4-11
(side screws) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 4-22. Operator Panel settings . . . . . . . 4-12
3-4. Attaching the cover to the library chassis 4-23. Factory default settings . . . . . . . 4-12
(rear screws) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 4-24. Error status menu . . . . . . . . . 4-13
3-5. Rack mount screw locations for front 4-25. Library Verify diagnostics . . . . . . 4-13
vertical rails . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 4-26. Drive diagnostics . . . . . . . . . 4-14
3-6. Rack mount screw locations for rear vertical 4-27. SAS wrap tool . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 4-28. Web User Interface menu . . . . . . 4-15
3-7. Attaching the front brackets to the library 4-29. System Summary screen . . . . . . . 4-16
chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 4-30. Library Map screen . . . . . . . . 4-17
3-8. Attaching the rear brackets to the rails 3-9 4-31. Move Cartridges screen . . . . . . . 4-19
3-9. Creating the rail assemblies . . . . . . 3-10 4-32. Unload Drive screen . . . . . . . . 4-20
3-10. Installing the rail assemblies. . . . . . 3-11 4-33. Clean Drive screen . . . . . . . . . 4-20
3-11. Securing the front of the library in the rack 3-11 4-34. Library State screen . . . . . . . . 4-20
3-12. Securing the rear of the library in the rack 3-12 4-35. Inventory screen . . . . . . . . . 4-21
3-13. The cables at the rear of the library 3-12 4-36. Inventory progress bar . . . . . . . 4-21
3-14. Accessor locking screw . . . . . . . 3-13 4-37. User Access screen . . . . . . . . . 4-21
3-15. Interface cable connection . . . . . . 3-13 4-38. Physical library settings screen . . . . . 4-22
3-16. Java security warning message . . . . . 3-18 4-39. Logical library settings screen . . . . . 4-23
3-17. Web User Interface login screen 3-18 4-40. Network settings screen . . . . . . . 4-24
3-18. System summary . . . . . . . . . 3-19 4-41. Encryption settings screen . . . . . . 4-25
3-19. Logical library mode settings . . . . . 3-19 4-42. Encryption settings enabled screen 4-26
3-20. Cartridge assignment settings . . . . . 3-21 4-43. Date and Time settings screen . . . . . 4-27
3-21. Network settings . . . . . . . . . 3-21 4-44. E-mail settings screen . . . . . . . . 4-28
3-22. Date and Time settings . . . . . . . 3-22 4-45. SNMP settings screen . . . . . . . . 4-29
3-23. Encryption settings. . . . . . . . . 3-24 4-46. Configuration using cookies. . . . . . 4-31
3-24. Encryption enabled settings . . . . . . 3-25 4-47. Save/Restore screen . . . . . . . . 4-31
3-25. E-mail notifications. . . . . . . . . 3-26 4-48. Key path diagnostics screen . . . . . . 4-32
3-26. Trap notifications . . . . . . . . . 3-27 4-49. Operator interventions screen . . . . . 4-33
3-27. Trap list settings . . . . . . . . . 3-28 4-50. View Library Logs screen . . . . . . 4-34
3-28. SNMPv3 user list settings . . . . . . 3-29 4-51. Traces screen . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
3-29. User access settings . . . . . . . . 3-29 4-52. Download Drive Logs screen . . . . . 4-35
3-30. Add User dialog . . . . . . . . . 3-30 4-53. Download Library Logs screen . . . . . 4-36
3-31. Save configuration . . . . . . . . . 3-30 4-54. Reset library and drive screen . . . . . 4-36
3-32. Cartridge release gate . . . . . . . . 3-34 4-55. Firmware Update screen . . . . . . . 4-37
3-33. Cartridge orientation . . . . . . . . 3-35 4-56. Usage Statistics screen. . . . . . . . 4-38
4-1. Operator Panel top menus . . . . . . 4-3 5-1. IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge 5-1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 ix

 5-2. Ultrium WORM tape cartridge . . . . . 5-4 8-18. Attaching the rear brackets to the rails 8-11
| 5-3. Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 5 8-19. Creating the rail assemblies . . . . . . 8-12
| Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 8-20. Installing the rail assemblies . . . . . 8-13
5-4. Setting the write-protect switch . . . . . 5-8 8-21. Securing the front of the library in the rack 8-13
5-5. Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase . . . . . 5-9 8-22. Securing the rear of the library in the rack 8-14
5-6. Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping 5-9 8-23. The cables at the rear of the library 8-14
5-7. Checking for gaps in the seams of a 8-24. Removing Accessor locking screw 8-14
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 8-25. Library configuration using cookies 8-16
5-8. Leader pin in the incorrect and correct 8-26. Auto saved data confirmation . . . . . 8-17
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 8-27. Overwrite confirmation dialog box 8-17
5-9. Placing the dislodged leader pin into the 8-28. Save/Restore screen . . . . . . . . 8-18
correct position . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 8-29. RID tag . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
5-10. Rewinding the tape into the cartridge 5-13 9-1. Types of power cord receptacles . . . . . 9-3
5-11. Leader Pin Reattachment Kit . . . . . 5-14 A-1. Java security warning message . . . . . A-2
5-12. Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the A-2. Login window . . . . . . . . . . A-2
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 A-3. Service account window . . . . . . . A-3
5-13. Winding the tape out of the cartridge 5-16 A-4. Removing screws from the rear of the
5-14. Removing the C-clip from the leader pin 5-16 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
5-15. Attaching the leader pin to the tape 5-17 A-5. Removing the deskside cover . . . . . A-6
6-1. Front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . 6-10 A-6. Removing side rails from the library chassis A-6
8-1. Cartridge magazine lock release access hole 8-2 A-7. Removing screws at the rear of the library A-6
8-2. Insert Accessor locking screw . . . . . 8-3 A-8. Removing screws at the front of the library A-7
8-3. Removing cables at the rear of the library 8-3 A-9. Library chassis cover screw locations A-7
8-4. Removing screws at the rear of the library 8-4 A-10. Library chassis cover removal . . . . . A-8
8-5. Removing screws at the front of the library 8-4 A-11. Internal components . . . . . . . . A-9
8-6. Removing the front brackets from the A-12. Rear panel of the SAS Half-high drive A-10
library chassis . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 A-13. Drive housing screw locations A-10
8-7. Attaching the side rails to the library chassis 8-5 A-14. Tape drive removal . . . . . . . . A-11
8-8. Attaching the feet . . . . . . . . . 8-6 A-15. Removing the bezel and the cover from
8-9. Attaching the cover to the library chassis the internal drive . . . . . . . . . A-13
(side screws) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 A-16. Rewinding tape into cartridge A-14
8-10. Attaching the cover to the library chassis A-17. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
(rear screws) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 train . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
8-11. Removing the Accessor locking screw 8-7 A-18. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) A-16
8-12. Inserting Accessor locking screw . . . . 8-8 A-19. Rewinding tape into cartridge A-17
8-13. Removing screws from the rear of the A-20. Rewinding tape into cartridge A-18
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 A-21. Rewinding tape into cartridge A-19
8-14. Removing the cover from the library chassis 8-9 A-22. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
8-15. Removing the feet . . . . . . . . . 8-10 train . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
8-16. Removing side rails from the library A-23. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) A-20
chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-17. Attaching the front brackets to the library
chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

x IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Tables
1-1. Data capacity and recording format 1-2 5-7. Media supplies . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
1-2. Front panel component descriptions 1-2 5-8. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code
1-3. Rear panel component descriptions 1-5 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
1-4. Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge 6-1. Front Panel LED indicators . . . . . . 6-10
compatibility with Ultrium tape drive . . . 1-9 9-1. Optional features . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
1-5. Physical specifications. . . . . . . . 1-10 9-2. Customer replaceable units . . . . . . 9-2
1-6. Electrical specifications . . . . . . . 1-10 9-3. Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
1-7. Environmental specifications . . . . . 1-10 A-1. Menu commands and access privileges A-4
| 1-8. Operational specifications . . . . . . 1-11 A-2. Internal component descriptions A-9
1-9. Acoustical specifications . . . . . . . 1-11 B-1. Library error codes . . . . . . . . . B-1
2-1. Operator Panel component descriptions 2-1 B-2. Drive error codes . . . . . . . . . B-11
3-1. Location criteria . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 B-3. Web user error messages . . . . . . . B-11
3-2. Deskside kit . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 B-4. Trap list . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
3-3. Rack mount assembly kit . . . . . . . 3-6 C-1. TapeAlert flags supported by the library C-1
3-4. Default library configuration settings 3-15 C-2. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium
5-1. Ultrium data cartridges . . . . . . . 5-2 tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
5-2. Data capacity and recording format 5-2 D-1. Sense key definitions . . . . . . . . D-1
| 5-3. Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge D-2. Library sense data . . . . . . . . . D-2
| compatibility with Ultrium tape drive . . . 5-3 D-3. Ultrium Tape drive sense data . . . . . D-3
5-4. Bar code label requirements for the Ultrium D-4. Ultrium Tape drive sense data - Bytes 12
tape drive and library . . . . . . . . 5-5 and 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
5-5. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with E-1. Device driver types . . . . . . . . . E-1
the Ultrium 3, 4, and 5 Tape Drive . . . . 5-6 E-2. Library sense data example . . . . . . E-3
5-6. Environment for operating, storing, and E-3. Drive sense data example . . . . . . . E-4
shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge . 5-18

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 xi

xii IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Safety and Environmental Notices
When using this product, observe the danger, caution, and attention notices that
are contained in this guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent
the severity of the safety condition.

Most danger or caution notices contain a reference number (Dxxxx or Cxxxx). Use
the reference number to check the translation in the IBM Systems Safety Information
Manual (G229-9054) publication included in your ship group.

The sections that follow define each type of safety notice and give examples.

Danger Notice
A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially
lethal or extremely hazardous to people. A lightning bolt
symbol always accompanies a danger notice to represent a
dangerous electrical condition

Caution Notice
A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to
people because of some existing condition. A caution notice can be accompanied
by one of several symbols:

If the symbol is... It means...

A hazardous electrical condition with less severity than
electrical danger.

A generally hazardous condition not represented by other

safety symbols.

A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the

product. Laser symbols are always accompanied by the
classification of the laser as defined by the U. S. Department
of Health and Human Services (for example, Class I, Class II,
and so forth).

A hazardous condition due to mechanical movement in or

around the product.

A hazardous condition due to the weight of the unit. Weight

symbols are accompanied by an approximation of the
product's weight.
svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 xiii

 If the symbol is... It means...
| A hazardous condition due to the unit’s susceptibility to
| electrostatic discharge.

|
|
|
|
| Laser Safety and Compliance
| Before using the library, review the following laser safety information.

| Class I Laser Product

|| The library may contain a laser assembly that complies with the performance
| standards set by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration for a Class I laser
| product. Class I laser products do not emit hazardous laser radiation. The
| library has the necessary protective housing and scanning safeguards to
|| ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class
| I limits. External safety agencies have reviewed the library and have
| obtained approvals to the latest standards as they apply.
|
|
| Performing the Safety Inspection Procedure
| Before you service the unit, perform the following safety inspection procedure:
| 1. Stop all activity between the host and the library’s tape drive.
| 2. Turn off the power to the library by switching the Power button on the rear of
| the tape library to the Off position.
| 3. Disconnect the tape drive’s SAS cable.
| 4. Unplug the library’s power cord from the electrical outlet and the library’s
| power supply unit.
| 5. Check the library’s power cords for damage, such as a pinched, cut, or frayed
| cord.
| 6. Check the tape drive’s SAS cable for damage.
| 7. Check the cover of the library for sharp edges, damage, or alterations that
| expose its internal parts.
| 8. Check the cover of the library for proper fit. It should be in place and secure.
| 9. Check the product label at the rear of the library to make sure it matches the
| voltage at your outlet.

xiv IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
|
| Rack Safety
| The following general safety information should be used for all rack mounted
| devices.

| DANGER

| v Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet.

| v Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
| v To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven mechanical loading, always
| install the heaviest devices in the bottom of the rack cabinet. Always install
| servers and optional devices starting from the bottom of the rack cabinet.
| v Rack mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or work space. Do not
| place any object on top of rack mounted devices.
| v Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord. Be sure to
| disconnect all power cords in the rack cabinet before servicing any device
| in the rack cabinet.
| v Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to power devices installed in
| the same rack cabinet. Do not plug a power cord from a device installed in
| one rack cabinet into a power device installed in a different rack cabinet.
| v An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous
| voltage on the metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the
| system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is
| correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock.
|

| CAUTION:
| v Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures
| will exceed the manufacturer's recommended ambient temperature for all your
| rack mounted devices.
| v Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised. Ensure that
| air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side of the unit.
| v Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the
| supply circuit so that overloading of the circuits does not compromise the
| supply wiring or overcurrent protection. To provide the correct power
| connection to a rack, refer to the rating labels located on the equipment in the
| rack to determine the total power requirement of the supply circuit.
| v (For sliding drawers) Do not pull out or install any drawer or feature if the rack
| stabilizer brackets are not attached to the rack. Do not pull out more than one
| drawer at a time. The rack may become unstable if you pull out more than
| one drawer at a time.
| v (For fixed drawers) This drawer is a fixed drawer and should not be moved for
| servicing unless specified by the manufacturer. Attempting to move the
| drawer partially or completely out of the rack may cause the rack to become
| unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the rack.

| (R001)

Safety and Environmental Notices xv

| CAUTION:

| Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves
| rack stability during relocation. Follow these general guidelines whenever you
| relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building:
| v Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment starting at the
| top of the rack cabinet. When possible, restore the rack cabinet to the
| configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. If this configuration is not
| known, you must do the following:
| – Remove all devices in the 32U position and above.
| – Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack
| cabinet.
| – Ensure that there are no empty U-levels between devices installed in the
| rack cabinet below the 32U level.
| v If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets, detach
| the rack cabinet from the suite.
| v Inspect the route that you plan to take to eliminate potential hazards.
| v Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the loaded
| rack cabinet. Refer to the documentation that comes with your rack cabinet for
| the weight of a loaded rack cabinet.
| v Verify that all door openings are at least 762 x 2032 mm (30 x 80 in.).
| v Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and cables are secure.
| v Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position.
| v Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the rack cabinet during
| movement.
| v Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees.
| v Once the rack cabinet is in the new location, do the following:
| – Lower the four leveling pads.
| – Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
| – If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rack
| cabinet from the lowest position to the highest position.
| v If a long distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to the
| configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. Pack the rack cabinet in
| the original packaging material, or equivalent. Also lower the leveling pads to
| raise the casters off of the pallet and bolt the rack cabinet to the pallet.

| (R002)

xvi IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
|
| Power Cords
|| For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to
| use with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord
| and plug with a properly grounded outlet.
|| IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter’s
|| Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

| For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
| cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
| a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
| plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.

| For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S.use): Use a UL-listed and
| CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
| three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
| grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.

| For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
| with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
| safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.

| IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that
| country or region.
|
|
| Cautions and Regulatory Compliance Statements for NEBS
| This library is NEBS certified. This section includes the cautions and regulatory
| compliance statements for the Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS)
| certification from the Telcordia Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety
| - Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment (A Module of
| LSSGR, FR-64; TSGR, FR-440; and NEBSFR, FR-2063) Telcordia Technologies
| Generic Requirements, GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4, June 2006.

| NEBS Compliance Statements

||

| CAUTION:
| To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089-CORE standard for electromagnetic compatibility
| and safety, for Ethernet RJ-45 ports, use only shielded Ethernet cables that are grounded
| on both ends. In a NEBS installation, all Ethernet ports are limited to intra-building
| wiring.

Safety and Environmental Notices xvii

|

| CAUTION:
| The intra-building ports of the equipment or subassembly are only suitable for
| connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling. The intra-building ports of
| the equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that
| connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use only as
| intra-building interfaces (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue
| 4), and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of primary
| protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to
| OSP wiring.
| An external Surge Protective Device (SPD) is not required for operating this library.
| This product can be installed in a network telecommunication facility or location where the
| NEC applies.
|
|
Product Recycling and Disposal
This unit contains recyclable materials.

This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national
regulations. IBM encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. IBM offers a
variety of product return programs and services in several countries to assist
equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on IBM product
recycling offerings can be found on IBM's Internet site at http://www.ibm.com/ibm/
recycle/us/index.shtml and http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/
index.shtml.

Note: This paragraph is also translated into Spanish as follows:

Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la

normativa nacional o local aplicable. IBM recomienda a los propietarios de equipos
de tecnología de la información (TI) que reciclen responsablemente sus equipos
cuando éstos ya no les sean útiles. IBM dispone de una serie de programas y
servicios de devolución de productos en varios países, a fin de ayudar a los
propietarios de equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar
información sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de IBM en el sitio Web de
IBM http://www.ibm.com/ ibm/environment/products/index.shtml.

Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and
Norway.

xviii IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC
concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive
determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as
applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various
products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather
reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.

Remarque: Cette marque s'applique uniquement aux pays de l'Union Européenne

et à la Norvège.

L'etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne 2002/96/EC en matière de

Déchets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE), qui détermine les
dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux systèmes utilisés à travers
l'Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite étiquette précise que le
produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté mais être récupéré en fin de
vie.

In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic

equipment (EEE) is to be collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or
recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the
WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted
municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the
return, recycling, and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to
minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due
to the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and
treatment, contact your local IBM representative.

Safety and Environmental Notices xix

xx IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Preface
This manual contains information and instructions necessary for the setup,
operation, and servicing of the IBM® System Storage™ TS2900 Tape Autoloader
(Machine Type 3572).

Related Publications
Refer to the following publications for additional information. To ensure that you
have the latest publications, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/.
v IBM System Storage® TS2900 Tape Autoloader Installation Quick Reference
(GA76-0423) provides hardware installation instructions.
v IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader SCSI Reference (GC27-2211) provides
information on the SCSI commands supported by this library.
v IBM Tape Device Driver Installation and User’s Guide (GA32-2130) provides
instructions for attaching IBM-supported hardware to open-systems operating
systems. It indicates what devices and levels of operating systems are supported.
It also gives requirements for adapter cards, and tells how to configure hosts to
use the device driver. All of the above are with the Ultrium family of devices.
v IBM Tape Device Driver Programming Reference (GA32- 0566) supplies information
to application owners who want to integrate their open-systems applications
with IBM-supported Ultrium hardware. The reference contains information
about the application programming interfaces (APIs) for each of the various
supported operating system environments.
v IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference (GA32-0450) provides
SCSI supported commands and protocol governing the behavior of the SCSI
interface.
v IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform: Quick Start Guide
(GA76-0420) gets you started with a basic configuration for encryption on LTO 4
tape drives.*
v IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform: Introduction, Planning
and User’s Guide (GA76-0418) contains information to help you install, configure,
and use the IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform.*

* This publication is not distributed in printed form. To get the latest version of
this publication in PDF format, please visit http://www.ibm.com/support/
documentation/us/en, enter “Encryption Key Manager” in the Search across
document types... field, click the search icon, and scroll down to the publication
title. You can also go to http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/publications/
servlet/pbi.wss?CTY+US/ and search for the publication form number or title.
| v IBM Tivoli® Key Lifecycle Manager V1.0 (English) publications may be
| downloaded from the following Web site: http://www.ibm.com/software/
| tivoli/library.
| – IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Quick Start Guide (GI11-8738)
| – IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Installation and Configuration Guide
| (SC23-9977)
| v The IBM Publications Center: http://www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order.

| The Publications Center is a worldwide central repository for IBM product

| publications and marketing material with a catalog of 70,000 items. Extensive

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 xxi

| search facilities are provided. Payment options for orders are via credit card (in the
| U.S.) or customer number for 20 countries. A large number of publications are
| available online in various file formats, and they can all be downloaded by all
| countries, free of charge.

xxii IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Chapter 1. Product Description
“Front Panel” on page 1-2
“Cartridge Magazine” on page 1-4
“Rear Panel” on page 1-4
“Bar Code Reader” on page 1-5
“SAS Host Interface” on page 1-6
“Encryption” on page 1-6
“Supported Internet Protocols” on page 1-7
“Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Messaging” on page 1-7
“Network Time Protocol (NTP)” on page 1-8
“Ultrium Tape Drives” on page 1-8
“Media” on page 1-9
“Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning” on page 1-9
“Location Coordinates and Element Addresses” on page 1-9
“Library Specifications” on page 1-10
“Product Environment” on page 1-11
“Supported Servers, Operating Systems, and Software” on page 1-12
“Supported Device Drivers” on page 1-12

a29z0033

Figure 1-1. TS2900 Tape Autoloader

The IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader (Machine Type 3572) provides
compact, high-capacity, low-cost solutions for simple, unattended data backup. The
library has a compact 1U form factor with easy access to tape cartridges via a
| removable magazine. The TS2900 Tape Autoloader is an external stand-alone or
| rack-mountable unit that incorporates an IBM Ultrium 5 Half-High Tape Drive
| (Model S5H), IBM Ultrium 4 Half-High Tape Drive (Model S4H), or IBM Ultrium 3
| Half-High Tape Drive (Model S3H). It is equipped with a SAS (Serial Attached
| SCSI) host adapter attachment that has a data transfer rate of up to 6.0 Gbps (S5H
| and S4H) or 3.0 Gbps (S4H and S3H).

Note: The Ultrium 4 Half-High tape drive in S4H libraries manufactured after
March 2011 support 6.0 Gb/s.

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader has a 10-position removable cartridge magazine,

providing a maximum of 9 data cartridge positions, or a maximum of 8 data
cartridge positions with a configurable 1-slot I/O Station. One position is reserved

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 1-1

| as the tape drive exchange position and can be accessed by the library only. Tape
| cartridges supported in the TS2900 Tape Autoloader include the 1500 GB native
| physical capacity IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge (Ultrium 5), 800 GB native
| physical capacity IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge (Ultrium 4), 400 GB Tape
| Cartridge (Ultrium 3), 200 GB Tape Cartridge (Ultrium 2), 100 GB Tape Cartridge
| (Ultrium 1), and WORM (Ultrium 5, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 3). The library data
| storage capacity can be further increased using hardware compression.
Table 1-1. Data capacity and recording format
Type Native Data Capacity Recording Format
| Ultrium 5 1500 GB (3000 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on
compression) 1280 tracks, sixteen tracks at
a time.
Ultrium 4 800 GB (1600 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 896
compression) tracks, sixteen tracks at a
time.
Ultrium 3 400 GB (800 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 704
compression) tracks, sixteen tracks at a
time.
Ultrium 2 200 GB (400 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 512
compression) tracks, eight tracks at a time.
Ultrium 1 100 GB (200 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 384
compression) tracks, eight tracks at a time.

Front Panel

a29z0002
5 6 3 6 4 1 2

Figure 1-2. Front panel components

Table 1-2. Front panel component descriptions

Number Component Description
1 Operator Panel The Operator Panel features a monochrome 16-character
LCD graphic display located on the front of the library.
Library operations and service functions are performed
from this screen.

The Web User Interface offers some of the same

functionality as the Operator Panel using a web browser
for remote access to the library. For more information on
the Operator Panel and the Web User Interface, see
Chapter 2, “User Interfaces,” on page 2-1.
2 Control keys The control keys are located to the right of the Operator
Panel LCD display on the front of the library.

1-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 1-2. Front panel component descriptions (continued)
Number Component Description
3 Cartridge magazine The tape library has a single cartridge magazine that can
hold up to 9 data cartridges, or 8 data cartridges with a
1-slot I/O Station. See Figure 1-3 on page 1-4.

Column 5/Tier 1 in the cartridge magazine can be

configured as a 1-slot I/O Station. Column 5/Tier 2 in
the cartridge magazine is reserved for the exchange
position and can be accessed by the library only. The I/O
Station is used to import and export cartridges without
interrupting normal library operation. Beginning with
Column 4, a minimum of one column can be reserved for
cleaning cartridges. Cleaning cartridges are used to clean
the tape drive heads. For configuration details, see
“Physical Library Settings” on page 3-21.
4 Cartridge magazine Emergency cartridge magazine lock release. When the
release I/O Station is locked, insert a large, straightened paper
clip twice or hold the paper clip in place while sliding
the cartridge magazine past the I/O Station lock.
5 Serial number label The machine type and serial number of the library are
located on the front bezel of the library. The serial
number is the number that links the library to IBM
entitlement for service.
6 Air vents These vents draw cooler air into the library enclosure
and allow warm air to escape which helps keep the
library at a normal operating temperature.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-3

 Cartridge Magazine

r 1
ie n
T um
2
l
o
C

r 1
ie n
r 2

T um
1
ie n
T um

l
2

o
C
l
o
C

r 2
ie n
r 3

T um
ie n

1
T um
2

l
o
C
l
o
C

r 3
ie n
r 4

T um
1
ie n
T um

l
2

o
C
l
o
C

r 4
ie n
r 5

T um
1
ie n
T um

l
2

o
C
l
o
C

r 5
ie n
T um
1

2
l
o
C

a29z0025
3

Figure 1-3. Cartridge magazine

1 Cartridge locations as they appear 2 Cartridge magazine

in the Library Map. 3 Magazine handle
Note: These labels are for reference
only and do not appear on the
magazine.

Figure 1-4 shows the cartridge location label 1 and ruler 2 that appear on the
cartridge magazine. The ruler provides an indication of the distance, when opening
or withdrawing the magazine, to the end of the magazine before it clears the front
| edge of the library. To prevent dropping the magazine, support both ends of the
| magazine before it clears the front edge of the library.

1 2
a29z0057

Figure 1-4. Cartridge magazine (top view)

Rear Panel

1-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 3

a29z0003
5 4 1 2 6

Figure 1-5. Rear panel components

Table 1-3. Rear panel component descriptions

Number Component Description
1 Power connector The library connects to a 110/220 volt ac power
supply.
2 Power switch The library is powered ON when the power supply
switch on the rear panel is ON (|); the library has no
independent power switch on the front panel.
3 SAS host interface Serial-attached SCSI host interface cable connection.
connector The Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 SAS drives use the
SFF-8088 connection at the drive end and SFF-8088 or
SFF-8470 at the host adapter end.
4 Ethernet port This port is used to connect the library to a network.
5 Accessor locking screw The Accessor locking screw is used to lock the
accessor in place during transportation.

Important: Remove the Accessor locking screw before

powering ON the library.
6 Air vent These vents allow air to escape from the power
supply and tape drive sled.

Bar Code Reader

The bar code reader is an integral part of the library Accessor. The bar code reader
reads each cartridge bar code label that identify the types of cartridge magazines
and tape drive installed in the library and provides inventory feedback to the host
application, Operator Panel, and Web User Interface. The library stores the
customized inventory data in memory. Library firmware supports a 6 or
8-character volume serial number (VOLSER) on the bar code label on the tape
cartridge.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-5

 SAS Host Interface
| The Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 5 Half-High Tape Drives support the Serial
| Attached SCSI (SAS) interface. They have one Mini-SAS (SFF-8088) connector, and
| can be connected to a Mini-SAS (SFF-8088) or SAS (SFF-8470) at the host adapter
| end with the appropriate cable. The SFF-8088 SAS connectors on the Ultrium 3 and
| Ultrium 4 are compatible with SAS-1 cables. The SFF-8088 SAS connector on the
| Ultrium 5 is compatible with SAS-1 or SAS-2 cables.

A drive with a SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) interface can be linked directly to
controllers. SAS is a performance improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS
enables multiple devices (up to 128) of different sizes and types to be connected
| simultaneously with thinner and longer cables; its full-duplex signal transmission
| supports 3.0 Gb/s (S3H and S4H) or 6.0 Gb/s (S4H and S5H). In addition, the
TS2900 Tape Autoloader can be hot-plugged. SAS drives will auto-negotiate speed.

| Note: The Ultrium 4 Half-High tape drive in S4H libraries manufactured after
| March 2011 support 6.0 Gb/s.

Encryption
The LTO Ultrium 5 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drives support host Application Managed
Encryption (AME), Library Managed Encryption (LME), and System Managed
Encryption (SME), using T10 encryption methods, for SAS and Fibre Channel
drives only. Data encryption is supported with LTO Ultrium 5 and Ultrium 4 Data
Cartridges only. Encryption is also supported with library firmware version 4.0 or
higher.

Note: Application Managed Encryption (AME) does not require a key. Library
Managed Encryption (LME) and System Managed Encryption (SME) require
a license key which is available by purchasing Feature Code 5901.

| The encryption enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to
| encrypt and decrypt host tape application data. Encryption policy and encryption
| keys are provided by the host application or host server. A drive digital certificate
| is installed at manufacturing time. Each drive receives a unique serial number and
| certificate. The T10 application may validate each drive instance by checking the
| drive’s digital certificate.

| The LTO Ultrium encryption environment is complex and requires knowledge

| beyond that of product trained Service Support Representatives (SSRs). The
| Encryption function on tape drives (desktop, stand alone and within libraries) is
| configured and managed by the customer. In some instances, SSRs are required to
| enable encryption at a hardware level when service access or service password
| controlled access is required. Customer setup support is by Field Technical Sales
| Support (FTSS), customer documentation, and software support for encryption
| software problems. Customer 'how to' support is also provided via support line
| contract.

The encryption-capable library firmware allows the user to select None or

Application Managed Encryption from the Web User Interface. If a valid
Transparent Encryption license key has been previously entered, System Managed
Encryption or Library Managed Encryption can also be selected. The factory
default is None.

1-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 For more details, refer to the IBM Encryption Key Manager Installation, Planning, and
User’s Guide. See “Related Publications” on page xxi.

Supported Internet Protocols

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader supports the following Internet protocols:
v IPv4
v IPv6

To learn more about IPv4, visit http://www.iana.org/. To learn more about IPv6,
visit http://www.ipv6.org/.

| Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Messaging

Occasionally, the library may encounter a situation that you want to know about,
such as an open magazine or a fault that causes the library to stop. The library
provides a standard TCP/IP protocol called Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) to send alerts about conditions (such as need for operator intervention)
over a TCP/IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring station. These alerts are
called SNMP traps. Using the information supplied in each SNMP trap, the
monitoring station (together with customer-supplied software) can alert operations
personnel of possible problems or operator interventions that occur.

SNMP Traps
SNMP Traps are alerts or status messages that can be collected, monitored and
used to proactively manage attached libraries using SNMP protocol with the
SNMP monitoring station(s). In summary, each trap provides the following
information:
v Product Identification such as product name, description, manufacturer, model
number, firmware level, and the URL that the trap is designated for.
v Product Status such as the severity of the trap, status (current and previous) and
the time the trap occurred.
v Library State (physical device status) such as identification and status of devices
that are monitored. In the case of the library, it would include enclosure, power
supply, controller, magazine status, drive count, cartridge slot count, and I/O
station count. Also included would be certain library statistics, and where
appropriate, the fault FSC (fault symptom code) including the severity and
description of that fault.
v Drive Status such as the identification of each drive in the library, firmware
level, serial number and other address and status information.
v Trap Definitions such as library status change, open magazine, I/O accessed,
hard fault information, drive cleaning requests, excessive retries and library
returning to normal operations.
v SNMP MIBs: The library's Management Information Base (MIB) contains units
of information that specifically describe an aspect of the system, such as the
system name, hardware number or communications configuration. When using
SNMP to monitor your TS2900 Tape Autoloader, make sure that the IBM TS2900
MIB file is loaded on your SNMP monitoring station. SNMP traps will be sent to
the SNMP monitoring station(s) that are defined for your library (see
“Configuring SNMP Trap Notifications” on page 4-29). Download the SNMP
MIB file for this library from http://www.ibm.com/storage/support.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-7

 Network Time Protocol (NTP)
NTP is an Internet standard protocol that assures accurate synchronization of
computer clock times in a network of computers. Running as a continuous
background client program on a computer, NTP sends periodic time requests to a
server, obtaining server time stamps, and using them to adjust the client’s clock.

Ultrium Tape Drives

| The TS2900 Tape Autoloader supports the Ultrium 3 (3572-S3H), Ultrium 4
| (3572-S4H), and Ultrium 5 (3572-S5H) Half-High Tape Drives.

| The Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 5 Half-High Tape Drives support the Serial
| Attached SCSI (SAS) interface. They have one Mini-SAS (SFF-8088) connector.

a80hh015

Figure 1-6. Ultrium Half-High Tape Drive

Speed Matching
| To improve system performance, the Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 5 Tape
| Drives use a technique called speed matching to dynamically adjust its native
| (uncompressed) data rate to the slower data rate of the attached server.

Channel Calibration
| The channel calibration feature of the Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 5 Tape
| Drives customizes each read/write data channel for optimum performance. The
| customization enables compensation for variations in the recording channel
| transfer function, media characteristics, and read/write head characteristics.

Power Management
| The Ultrium 3, Ultrium 4, and Ultrium 5 Tape Drives feature a power management
| function that controls the drive’s electronics so that part of the electronics
| completely turn OFF when circuit functions are not needed for the drive’s
| operation.

1-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Media
| The TS2900 Tape Autoloader uses Ultrium Tape Cartridges that provide up to 1500
| GB native capacity (up to 3000 GB with 2:1 hardware data compression) for
| Ultrium 5 tape drives, 800 GB native capacity (up to 1600 GB with 2:1 hardware
| data compression) for Ultrium 4 tape drives, and up to 400 GB native capacity (up
| to 800 GB with 2:1 hardware compression) for Ultrium 3 tape drives.
Table 1-4. Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive
IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges
IBM Ultrium Tape 200GB 100GB
Drive 1500 GB 800 GB 400 GB
(Ultrium (Ultrium
(Ultrium 5) (Ultrium 4) (Ultrium 3)
2) 1)
| Ultrium 5 Read/Write Read/Write Read only
Ultrium 4 Read/Write Read/Write Read only
Read/
Ultrium 3 Read/Write Read only
Write
Read/ Read/
Ultrium 2
Write Write
Read/
Ultrium 1
Write

| Note: The TS2900 Tape Autoloader supports the Ultrium 3 (3572-S3H), Ultrium 4
| (3572-S4H), and Ultrium 5 (3572-S5H) Tape Drives only.

For more detailed information, see Chapter 5, “Media,” on page 5-1.

Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader uses a single SCSI ID and dual LUNs to control the
tape drive (LUN 0) and library accessor (LUN 1). The library requires a Host Bus
Adapter (HBA) that supports LUN scanning. If it is not enabled, your host system
will not scan beyond LUN 0 and will fail to detect the library. It will only see the
tape drive.

Important: Some HBAs, such as RAID controllers, do not support LUN scanning.

Location Coordinates and Element Addresses

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader incorporates IBM’s patented high-density (HD) slot
technology, which allows multiple cartridges to be stored in a tiered architecture.
The depth of a cartridge location in a high-density slot is known as a tier.
High-density slots are designed to contain multiple cartridges in Tiers 1 and 2.

Note: Each column has a spring-loaded mechanism that pushes a tape cartridge
into Tier 1 when it is the only cartridge in that column. A single cartridge in
a column takes on the Tier 2 element address even though it is physically
located in Tier 1.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-9

 Front Rear
Reserved slot

Column 5 Column 4 Column 3 Column 2 Column 1

Tier 2 Tier 2 Tier 2 Tier 2 Tier 2

Column 5 Column 4 Column 3 Column 2 Column 1

Drive
Tier 1 Tier 1 Tier 1 Tier 1 Tier 1

Accessor

Figure 1-7. Location coordinates

A storage element address is assigned to each cartridge at the time the cartridge is
inserted. Storage element addresses range from 4097 to 4105 (0x1001 to 0x1009)
when the I/O Station is not enabled, and from 4097 to 4104 (0x1001 to 0x1008)
when the I/O Station is enabled.

Library Specifications
Table 1-5. Physical specifications
Parameter Measurement
Front panel width (chassis/bezel) 445 mm (17.52 in.)/483 mm (19.02 in.)
Depth 850 mm (33.46 in.)
Height 44 mm (1.73 in.)
Weight (library only) 13 kg (28.66 lbs)

Table 1-6. Electrical specifications

Parameter Measurement
Voltage 100 to 240 Vac. (4.0 to 1.5 A)
Frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Power consumption 110 W

For additional information about installation specifications, see “Choosing a

Location” on page 3-2.
Table 1-7. Environmental specifications
Parameter Operating (see Note) Storage Shipping
10 to 38 °C 1 to 60 °C -40 to 60 °C
Temperature
(50 to 100 °F) (34 to 140 °F) (-40 to 140 °F)
Temperature
10 °C/hour (max) 10 °C/hour (max) 10 °C/hour (max)
variation
Relative humidity 20 to 80% 10 to 90% 10 to 90%
Wet bulb temperature 26 °C (78.8 °F) max. 29 °C (84 °F) max. 29 °C (84 °F) max.
Altitude (meters) 0 to 2,500 0 to 2,500 0 to 2,500

1-10 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table 1-7. Environmental specifications (continued)
Parameter Operating (see Note) Storage Shipping
Note: The operating environment of the library must not conflict with the media storage
requirements. The library may be capable of operating at elevated temperatures for an
extended period, however, the temperature could shorten the useful life of media that is
stored in the library. If media is stored in the library for more than 10 hours, the storage
temperature requirements for media should be met. It should be assumed that media
stored in the library is approximately 2 degrees above ambient temperature when the
library is powered ON.

| Table 1-8. Operational specifications

| Parameter Model S5H Model S4H Model 3SH
| Maximum storage 13.5 TB (27 TB with 7.2 TB (14.4 TB with 3.6 TB (7.2 TB with
| capacity 2:1 compression) 2:1 compression) 2:1 compression)
| Maximum number of
| 9 (including an optional I/O Station)
| data cartridges
| Drive types Ultrium 5 Half High Ultrium 4 Half High Ultrium 3 Half High
| 140 MB/s (280 MB/s 120 MB/s (240 MB/s 60 MB/s (120 MB/s
| Sustained native data
| with 2:1 with 2:1 with 2:1
| transfer rate
| compression) compression) compression)
| Interface 6 Gb/s SAS 3 Gb/s SAS
| Note: The Ultrium 4 Half-High tape drive in S4H libraries manufactured after March 2011
| support 6.0 Gb/s and a sustained native data rate of 120 Gb/s.
|
Table 1-9. Acoustical specifications
Parameter Measurement
Idling acoustical noise sound power level
6.6
LwAD in Bels (1 Bel = 10 dB)
Maximum acoustical noise sound power
6.8
level LwAD in Bels (1 Bel = 10 dB)

Product Environment
The TS2900 Tape Autoloader is designed to operate in a general business
environment.

The library meets the acoustical requirements for general business area category
2D. Category 2D states that the library should be installed a minimum of 4 m (13
ft.) from a permanent work station.

To allow for service access, install the library a minimum of 0.9 m (3 ft.) from all
obstacles.

The library is a precision computer peripheral. To ensure maximum longevity of

your library, locate the library away from dust, dirt, and airborne particulates, as
follows:
v Keep the library away from high-traffic areas, especially if the floor is carpeted.
Carpeting harbors dust and people walking on the carpet can cause the carpet
fibers and the dust to become airborne.
v Keep the library out of printer and copier rooms because of toner and paper
dust. Additionally, do not store paper supplies next to the library.
Chapter 1. Product Description 1-11
 v Keep the library away from moving air caused by doorways, open windows,
fans, and air conditioners.

Ensure that the machine covers are always kept closed to minimize any
contamination from airborne particles.

Supported Servers, Operating Systems, and Software

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader is supported by a wide variety of servers (hosts),
operating systems, adapters, and software. The supported attachments and
software can change throughout the life cycle of the product.

To determine the latest supported attachments:

| 1. Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/.
| 2. Select Storage Systems from the Product Group menu.
| 3. Select Tape Systems from the Product Family menu.
| 4. Select the appropriate link from the Product Type menu. For example, select
| Tape autoloaders and libraries from the Product Type menu, then TS2900
| Autoloader from the Product menu to find links to updates.

Supported Device Drivers

Device drivers enable the drive to interact with a variety of servers. To properly
install an IBM device drive (if required), refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers
Installation and User’s Guide. For applications that use other device drivers, see the
application’s documentation to determine which drivers to use.

| IBM maintains the levels of device drivers and driver documentation for the drive
| on the Internet. You can access this material at the web site: http://www.ibm.com/
| support/fixcentral.

Note: If you do not have Internet access and you need information about device
drivers, contact your Marketing Representative.

Note: The device driver for System i® servers is included in the OS/400® operating
system.

1-12 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 2. User Interfaces
“Operator Panel”
“Web User Interface” on page 2-5

The library has a local interface, the Operator Panel, and a remote Web User
Interface (UI).

The Operator Panel is located on the front of the library and allows users to work
locally on the library. The Web User Interface allows users and administrators to
view and perform some library functions from remote sites.

The Web User Interface is implemented as a Java Applet that runs in a web
browser from any PC on the network. The Java Applet requires that Java 1.5.0 or
higher be installed on your host computer for full functionality, and is best viewed
using Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher. Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher is required for
IPv6.

Operator Panel
The Operator Panel is located on the front bezel of the library. The Operator Panel
displays library information and menu commands used to execute library
management functions in response to the control keys located on the right of the
LCD display.

6 7 8 9 2 4
a29z0004

1 3 5

Figure 2-1. Operator Panel components

Table 2-1. Operator Panel component descriptions

Number Component Description
1 LCD display 16-character LCD graphic display
2 Plus key (+) Button used to navigate upward (↑) through the menu items
3 Minus key (-) Button used to navigate downward (↓) through the menu
items
4 Cancel key (X) Button used to cancel a user action and return to the last
menu item
5 Enter key Button used to display a submenu or to select a user action

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 2-1

 Table 2-1. Operator Panel component descriptions (continued)
Number Component Description
6 Ready/Activity Green LED lit when the unit is powered ON. The LED
LED flashes when there is any library activity or the library is
offline.
7 Clean Drive Amber LED lit when the drive needs cleaning. The LED
LED turns OFF after the drive is cleaned successfully.
8 Attention LED Amber LED lit when a cartridge is bad, marginal, or invalid.
The LED turns OFF when the media is removed from the
drive. The LED may also be lit when there is a power supply
problem.
9 Error LED Amber LED lit when there is an unrecoverable library or
drive failure. The corresponding error message appears on
the LCD display.

The Operator Panel operates in two basic modes:

v User Interaction mode - Mode employed when a user is pushing keys on the
Operator Panel.
v System Driven mode - Normal mode of operation where the Operator Panel
displays status in response to commands issued from the drive's internal
interface.

When an Operator Panel key is pressed and released, the Operator Panel
automatically transitions to User Interaction mode. User Interaction mode will
continue until 3 minutes after a user stops pushing keys, or the requested accessor
action stops, whichever is longer, then the Operator Panel returns to System
Driven mode.

If necessary, the Operator Panel will automatically transition to System Driven

mode. When this occurs, the library remembers what the user was doing before
the display mode changed.

Any operational conflict between commands received over the host interface or the
Web User Interface and those entered via the Operator Panel are avoided with a
reservation mechanism on a first-come, first-served basis. Operator Panel
commands are canceled by an Operator Panel logout or timeout.

Library firmware will not allow a user to select an impossible request. Those
situations will include, but are not limited to:
v Moving a cartridge from any source to a position occupied by another cartridge
v Moving a cartridge from an empty cartridge position
v Loading a cartridge from any source to a full drive
v Unloading a cartridge from an empty drive

Any error detected by the library or drive controller and not recoverable through
predetermined firmware algorithms is considered fatal. When an error occurs, an
error code is displayed on the Operator Panel display and the error LED is ON.
The error code remains on the Operator Panel until a key is pressed, which causes
the Operator Panel to return to the Home Screen. Numeric error codes are used for
unrecoverable fatal errors, otherwise text status messages are displayed.

2-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 When the library powers ON or resets, it goes through several internally controlled
initialization processes, called the Power-On-Self-Test (POST).

Front Panel LEDs

All LEDs are updated during power ON and reset sequences. At power ON or
software reset, all LEDs turn ON as soon as POST allows. When initialization
starts, all LEDs turn OFF and the Ready/Activity LED flashes at a rate of
approximately two seconds per cycle. When the mechanical initialization is
complete, the Ready/Activity LED stops flashing and turns ON.

If a library failure occurs, the Ready/Activity LED turns OFF and the Error LED
turns ON. The Operator Panel also displays an appropriate error code to help
identify the failure.

The following are additional operational details of LEDs:

v The Ready/Activity LED (6 in Figure 2-1 on page 2-1) turns ON any time the
unit is powered ON and functional. The Ready/Activity LED flashes whenever
there is library. This LED also flashes when the library is offline.
v The Clean Drive LED (7 in Figure 2-1 on page 2-1) turns ON when a
“cleaning required” command is issued by the drive. The LED turns OFF after a
successful drive cleaning operation.
v The Attention LED (8 in Figure 2-1 on page 2-1) turns ON to indicate that
there is a piece of media which is bad/marginal, or invalid. The LED turns OFF
when all marginal and invalid cartridges have been exported from the library.
The Attention LED also turns ON if Autoclean is enabled and no cleaning
cartridge is in a cleaning position.
v The Error LED (9 in Figure 2-1 on page 2-1) turns ON when there is an
unrecoverable drive or library failure. An error message is displayed on the
screen and the LED remains ON until the error state is resolved.

For more information, see “Interpreting Front Panel LEDs” on page 6-10.

Input Modes
There are several ways to enter values in the different menu items. These values
are selectable predefined values, toggle values (for example, ON/OFF) and
numerical values like network addresses.

Selecting Predefined Values

1. To set the predefined values, press the Enter key to select the menu item.
2. Using the Plus and Minus keys, select one of the various predefined values for
that item.
3. As soon as the Operator Panel display shows the correct value, press the Enter
key to apply the value.

Toggling Values
Toggle values are used to switch between two different states like ON and OFF.
1. After navigating to the menu item, press the Enter key to select the menu item.
2. Using the Plus and Minus keys, select one of the various predefined states for
that item.
3. Press the Enter key to apply the new state.

Chapter 2. User Interfaces 2-3

 Entering Numerical Values
Numerical values are needed for network addresses, password entries, and other
configuration entries.
1. After navigating to the menu item, the current value is displayed and the
cursor highlights the first digit of the value that can be changed.
2. For each digit to be changed in the value:
a. Use the Plus and Minus keys to increment or decrement the digit.
b. Press the Enter key to highlight the next editable digit.
3. Press the Enter key at the last digit to apply the complete entry, or press the
Cancel key to cancel the whole edit process and maintain the original value.

Logging in
At power ON or software reset, the library ready screen appears when POST
initialization completes successfully.

a29z0028

Figure 2-2. Library ready screen

To log in to the Operator Panel, press the Enter key. The password entry screen
appears.
a29z0029

Figure 2-3. Password entry screen

Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to change the current digit. Press the Enter
key to advance to the next digit. The default password is 0000. Once you have
logged in, you can change the password using the Change Login Password
command. See “Configuring Operator Panel Settings” on page 4-12.

Screen Elements

1 2
a29z0030

Figure 2-4. Screen elements

The Operator Panel display a single menu item (1 in Figure 2-4) on each screen.
The existence of other menu items above and below the currently displayed item is
indicated by the arrows (2 in Figure 2-4) on the right side of the screen.

In the Configuration menu, the current configuration setting is indicated by an

asterisk (3 in Figure 2-4) on the right side of the screen. For example, in

2-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Figure 2-4 on page 2-4, the I/O Station is currently enabled. When changing a
configuration setting, the confirmation screen in Figure 2-5 appears. Press the Enter
key to confirm, or Cancel to return to the previous screen.

a29z0032
Figure 2-5. Confirmation screen

Web User Interface

The Web User Interface Java Applet requires Java 1.5.0 or higher be installed on
your host computer for full functionality, and is best viewed using Internet
Explorer 6.0 or higher. Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher is required for IPv6. If your
computer does not have Java installed or you need to upgrade your installation,
download the latest version of the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) for your
platform from http://www.java.com/ and follow the instructions provided to
enable and configure the Java Runtime Environment for your browser.

The Web User Interface can also be used to update the library and drive firmware,
and to download error logs, drive dumps, and other library data from the library.

Before the TS2900 Tape Autoloader can be managed over a network using the Web
User Interface, you must set up the initial network configuration of the library
using the Operator Panel. For more information, see “Configuring Network
Settings” on page 3-21.

Logging in
To log in to the Web User Interface from Internet Explorer, you need to enter the IP
address of the library. The IP address can be obtained using the View Settings
command from the Operator Panel. For example, http://192.168.1.1.

When the applet launches, the following warning message appears. This message
is normal and does not indicate a problem.
a29z0160

Figure 2-6. Java security warning message

You can click the Always trust content from this publisher checkbox to avoid the
warning message in subsequent browser sessions.

Chapter 2. User Interfaces 2-5

 After launching the Web User Interface, the login window is displayed.

a29z0095
Figure 2-7. Login window

The factory default account login and password for an Administrator account is:
v Account: admin
v Password: secure

The account name and password are case sensitive. After entering your account
name and password, use your mouse to click Login or press the Enter key.

For information on account privileges, see “User Privileges” on page 2-8.

Common Header Elements

All Web User Interface windows (except for the Login screen) contain the
following common elements in the header:
v Help - Click to read context-sensitive help for the associated page.
v Logoff - Click to log out of the Web User Interface.

Menus Available from the Web User Interface

Figure 2-8 on page 2-7 shows the Web User Interface window for a User account,
Figure 2-9 on page 2-7 shows the window for a Superuser account, and Figure 2-10
on page 2-8 shows the window for an Administrator account.

2-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a29z0096
Figure 2-8. User account window

a29z0173

Figure 2-9. Superuser account window

Chapter 2. User Interfaces 2-7

 a29z0097
Figure 2-10. Administrator account window

For a complete description of all Web User Interface menu options, see Chapter 4,
“Operations,” on page 4-1.

User Privileges
User privilege levels are manually assigned to user accounts created within the
library. Controlling access to screens and operations within the library preserves
the integrity of the library and the data that is stored within the library.

There are three types of user privileges in the library.

v Users are allowed to monitor the library, but not perform actions that affect the
physical library.
v Superusers are allowed to operate the physical and logical library, but not
perform actions that affect the library configuration.
v Administrator users are allowed access to the entire physical library and logical
library, including configuration. One and only one administrator user must be
assigned the login name admin.

User privileges include:

v Multiple users can be logged in at one time on the Web User Interface.
v Any user can be logged into only one interface at a time.

For a comparison of user privileges, see “User Privilege Comparison” on page A-3.

2-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration
“Verifying the Shipment”
“Choosing a Location” on page 3-2
Installing Your Library “Installing the Deskside Cover” on page 3-2
“Installing in a Rack” on page 3-5
“Removing the Accessor Locking Screw” on page 3-12
“Attaching the Library to a Server” on page 3-13
“Configuring Your Library using the “Logging in to the Web User Interface” on page 3-17
Web User Interface” on page 3-17
“Checking Firmware Level” on page 3-19
“Configuring Library Settings” on page 3-19
“Configuring Network Settings” on page 3-21
“Configuring Date and Time Settings” on page 3-22
“Configuring Encryption Settings” on page 3-24
“Configuring E-mail Notifications” on page 3-26
“Configuring Trap Notifications” on page 3-27
“Managing User Access” on page 3-29
“Saving the Library Configuration” on page 3-30
“Configuring Your Library using the “Logging in to the Operator Panel” on page 3-31
Operator Panel” on page 3-31
“Configuring Network Settings” on page 3-31
“Configuring Library Settings” on page 3-32
“Populating the Library with Cartridges” on page 3-34
“Verifying Library and Drive Operation” on page 3-35
“Taking the Library Online” on page 3-36
“Registering for Support Notification” on page 3-36

To install and configure a desktop or rack-mounted TS2900 Tape Autoloader,

perform the procedures in this chapter in the order they are presented.

Verifying the Shipment

Verify that the following items are included in the library shipment:
v Power cord
v IBM Translated Safety Notices
v Safety notices pointer sheet (pointing to the CD-ROM)
v Quick Reference
v Setup, Operator, and Service guide CD-ROM
v Warranty information
v Device driver pointer sheet (pointing to the Internet)
v Quality Hotline card
v Rack mount kit or Deskside kit
v SAS wrap tool

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 3-1

 v Optional transparent LTO encryption information

The following additional items are required for installation and library operation:
v SAS cable
v Data cartridges
v Cleaning cartridge
v Ethernet cable

Important: If any of the contents of your shipment are damaged or missing, please
call the appropriate number listed on the Quality Hotline card.

Choosing a Location
Choose a location that meets the following criteria:
Table 3-1. Location criteria
Criteria Definition
Room temperature 16 to 32 °C (60 to 90 °F)
Voltage 100 to 240 Vac. (4.0 to 1.5 A)
Note: The power switch is located on the
rear of the library and must be easily
accessible at all times.
Frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Relative humidity 20 to 80% non-condensing
Air quality The library should be placed in an area with
minimal sources of particulate
contamination. Avoid areas near frequently
used doors and walkways, stacks of supplies
that collect dust, printers, and smoke-filled
rooms. Excessive dust and debris can
damage cartridges and the tape drive.
Clearance v Back: Minimum of 15 cm (6 in.)
v Front: Minimum of 30 cm (12 in.)
v Sides: Minimum of 5 cm (2 in.)
Rack requirements Standard EIA 19-inch rack: 1U space

Installing the Deskside Cover

A deskside cover and six desktop feet must be installed on the library chassis
before the library can be used as a desktop unit. If you intend to install the library
in a rack, skip this step and proceed to “Installing in a Rack” on page 3-5.

Table 3-2 lists the parts in the deskside assembly kit. A Phillips head screwdriver
(preferably with a magnetic head) will be needed to assemble the deskside kit.
Table 3-2. Deskside kit
Number Part Number Quantity Description Part
a29z0034

1 45E3240 6 1U desktop foot

3-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 3-2. Deskside kit (continued)
Number Part Number Quantity Description Part

a29z0035
2 45E3798 1 Deskside cover

Bracket, 1U
3 45E3799 1
library right rail

a29z0036
Screw,

a29z0037
cross-recessed
binding head,
4 45E3749 2 M4x4 (for
securing the rear
of the cover to
the library)

Bracket, 1U
5 45E3801 1
library left rail

a29z0038
Screw,
cross-recessed
a29z0039

flat head, M3x6

(6 for securing
6 45E3802 12 left and right
rails to library; 6
for securing sides
of cover to
library)

To install the deskside cover on your library:

1. Verify that your deskside kit includes all the necessary contents. See Table 3-2
on page 3-2.
2. Attach the left 5 and right 3 rails to the chassis using three flat-head screws
6 on each side (Figure 3-1 on page 3-4).

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-3

 5

a29z0009
6

Figure 3-1. Attaching side rails to the library chassis

3. Turn the library over and attach the desktop feet 1 to the designated
locations on the bottom of the library (Figure 3-2). Return the library to the
upright position.

a29z0013

Figure 3-2. Attaching the desktop feet

4. Position the deskside cover 2 in the correct orientation over the library
chassis and attach the cover to the library using 3 flat-head screws 6 on each
side (Figure 3-3 on page 3-5).

3-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 6

a29z0011
6

Figure 3-3. Attaching the cover to the library chassis (side screws)

5. Attach the deskside cover using the 2 large binding-head screws 4 on the
rear of the library (Figure 3-4).

a29z0012
Figure 3-4. Attaching the cover to the library chassis (rear screws)

6. Place the library in the desired desktop location.

Important: Do not place the library on its side. Do not stack objects on top of the
library.

Installing in a Rack
The TS2900 Tape Autoloader can be easily installed into a standard 19-inch rack
system. A standard 19-inch rack system contains multiple mounting locations
called EIA units as defined by the Electronics Industries Association. Each EIA unit
contains three square or round holes used to mount rack designed equipment. The
library requires 1 EIA unit (1U) of rack space. Each unit is separated by a small
space.

Table 3-3 on page 3-6 lists the parts in the rack mount assembly kit. A Phillips head
screwdriver (preferably with a magnetic head) will be needed to assemble the rack
mount kit.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-5

Table 3-3. Rack mount assembly kit
Number Part Number Quantity Description Part

1 45E3741 1 Left rear bracket

a29z0040
2 45E3742 1 Right rear bracket

a29z0041
3 45E3743 1 Left front bracket

a29z0042
4 45E3744 1 Right front bracket

a29z0043

5 45E3745 1 Left front rail

a29z0044

6 45E3746 1 Right front rail

a29z0045

7 45E3747 2 Rear rail

a29z0046

3-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 3-3. Rack mount assembly kit (continued)
Number Part Number Quantity Description Part

Screw, cross-recessed

a29z0047
8 45E5909 4
flat head, M3x4

Screw, flat head, self

a29z0048
9 45E3748 8
locking, M6x10

Screw, cross-recessed

a29z0049
10 45E3749 6
binding head

Screw, cross-recessed

a29z0050
11 45E3867 2
pan head, M6x10

Hook and loop fastener

12 07H6655 1
strap

a29z0051

a29z0058
Rack device to PDU
13 39M5378 1 E

line cord
N L

When deciding on a location in your rack for the library, remember that the
Operator Panel has a small LCD screen and should be positioned to allow for easy
viewing. The rear of the library should be free from any obstructions to allow easy
access to the power switch and other rear panel components.

Note: Before beginning the rack installation of the library, read the safety
information in “Rack Safety” on page xv. Also, verify that no desktop feet
are attached to the bottom of the library.

The library requires 1U rack space in an EIA standard sized rack. One unit (1U) of
vertical rack space is equal to 4.45 cm (1.75 in), and contains three holes with
equidistant centers of 1.59 cm (0.625 in.). The boundary between each 1U rack
space is identified by two holes separated by only 1.27 cm (0.5 in.).

To install the library in a rack:

1. Verify that your rack kit includes all the necessary contents. See Table 3-3 on
page 3-6.
2. Determine the location in your rack for your library to be installed and, using a
pencil, mark the location on the front vertical rails (Figure 3-5 on page 3-8) and
rear vertical rails (Figure 3-6 on page 3-8) in your rack.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-7

 Figure 3-5. Rack mount screw locations for front vertical rails a29z0014
a29z0015

Figure 3-6. Rack mount screw locations for rear vertical rails

3. Attach the left 3 and right 4 (Figure 3-7 on page 3-9) front brackets to the
front of the library chassis using two flat-head screws 8 on each side. Use the

3-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 bottom two screw holes on each side.

8
3

a29z0017
8

Figure 3-7. Attaching the front brackets to the library chassis

4. Attach the left 1 and right 2 rear brackets to the left 5 and right 6 front
rails using two round-head screws 10 on each side (Figure 3-8).

Note: Run the hook and loop fastener strap 12 through the slot on the right
rear bracket and attach it back upon itself.

1 12
2

10

5
a29z0019

Figure 3-8. Attaching the rear brackets to the rails

Important: Do NOT tighten these screws completely at this time.

5. Slide in the rear rails 7 from back to front, to create the rail assemblies.
Ensure the screw holes face outwards (Figure 3-9 on page 3-10).

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-9

 7

a29z0018
Figure 3-9. Creating the rail assemblies

6. Install the rail assemblies into the rack (Figure 3-10 on page 3-11). Ensure the
three holes in the front of the unit align with the 1U space marked on the
vertical rails in 2 on page 3-7. Secure the rails to the rack using four flat-head
screws 9 on each side of the rack. Use both of the two screw locations on the
rear of the rack rail (Figure 3-6 on page 3-8). Use the top and middle screw
locations on the front of the rack rail (Figure 3-5 on page 3-8).

3-10 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 9

a29z0020
Figure 3-10. Installing the rail assemblies

7. Slide the library chassis into the rack. Secure the front of the library to the rack
using the large black screws 11 in the bottom holes on each front bracket
(Figure 3-11).

11
a29z0021

Figure 3-11. Securing the front of the library in the rack

8. Secure the rear of the library to the rack using a round-head screw 10 on
each rear bracket (Figure 3-12 on page 3-12). Tighten the other rear bracket

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-11

 screws to secure the library to the rack.

10 10

a29z0022
Figure 3-12. Securing the rear of the library in the rack

9. Run the SAS cable, power cable, and Ethernet cable through the hook and loop
fastener strap 12, leaving enough slack to reach the corresponding
connectors, then tighten the strap (Figure 3-13).

12

a29z0023

Figure 3-13. The cables at the rear of the library

Note: For information about converting and relocating the library, see
Chapter 8, “Removal and Replacement Procedures,” on page 8-1.

Removing the Accessor Locking Screw

Important: The Accessor locking screw prevents the library Accessor from moving
during shipment and must be removed before the library is powered ON.

Remove the Accessor locking screw, located on the rear panel of the library (1 in
Figure 3-14 on page 3-13).

3-12 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a29z0102
1

Figure 3-14. Accessor locking screw

Attaching the Library to a Server

The drive is attached to a server using the Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) interface.
The Web User Interface accesses the library using an Ethernet interface.

Connecting the Host Interface Cables

To connect the host interface cable to the library:

| Note: It is recommended that you shut down and turn OFF the associated server
| prior to connecting the SAS interface cable. Turn ON the associated server
| after the SAS interface cable is connected to the library and server, the
| library has been powered ON, and the library has completed initialization.

1 2 3
a29z0100

Figure 3-15. Interface cable connection

1. Attach an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port (1 in Figure 3-15)

Note: On rack mount installations, run the cable through the hook and loop
fastener strap on the right rear bracket.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-13

 2. Attach the host end of the SAS cable to the drive’s SAS connector (2 in
| Figure 3-15 on page 3-13). See “SAS Host Interface” on page 1-6 for information
| on the type of SAS connector required for attachment to the drive.

Note: On rack mount installations, run the cable through the hook and loop
fastener strap on the right rear bracket.
3. Attach the other end of the host SAS interface cable to the host or to an
interposer if required.
4. Method 1: Plug the Ethernet cable into your server or PC to access the Web
User Interface directly. This method allows you to modify your server or PC
network settings to match the library default settings. You can also use the
library Operator Panel to change the library network settings to match the
server or PC network settings prior to using the Web User Interface to access
the library. If the Ethernet connection is directly attached to a server or a PC, a
crossover Ethernet cable may be required.
Method 2: Plug the Ethernet cable into an Ethernet switch or router to access
the Web User Interface on a LAN (Local Area Network). The library network
settings must first be entered using the Operator Panel prior to using the Web
User Interface to access the library.

Connecting the Power Cord

Important: This product can ONLY be used with an approved power cord for your
specific geographic region. Use of an unapproved power cord may result in:
v Not meeting individual country specific safety requirements
v Overheating with potential personal injury and/or property damage
v A fracture resulting in the internal contacts being exposed, which potentially
could subject the user to a shock hazard

To connect a power cord:

1. Plug one end of the power cord or rack PDU line cord into the power
connector (3 in Figure 3-15 on page 3-13) on the rear panel of the library.

Note: On rack mount installations, run the rack PDU line cord through the
hook and loop fastener strap on the right rear bracket, and tighten the
strap. The rack PDU line cord is a special power cord that plugs into a
rack power strip.
2. Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest properly grounded
power outlet. On rack mount installations, plug the other end of the rack PDU
line cord into the nearest rack PDU.
3. Power ON the library by toggling the power switch on the power supply to the
ON (|) position.
4. Wait for the library to initialize.
| During initialization, the library performs a Power ON Self Test (POST) to
| ensure that the library hardware is functional. The library also tests
| communications with the tape drive over the internal bus.

Note: If the Operator Panel does not initialize, check all cable connections, and
ensure that the cartridge magazine is closed and in the locked position, and
that the power supply switch is in the ON position. If the Operator Panel
still does not initialize, see Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.

3-14 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Important: To disconnect all power from the library, turn the power switch to the
OFF position, then remove the power cord from the outlet. The power switch
removes power from portions of the library and the drive, but the power supply
still has ac power at its input.

Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is OFF
before powering ON again.

Configuring the Library

The library can be configured using the Web User Interface and/or the Operator
Panel. The recommended method for configuring your library is using the Web
User Interface. See “Configuring Your Library using the Operator Panel” on page
3-31 and “Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface” on page 3-17.

For complete detailed information on all of the functions available on the library
using both the Operator Panel and the Web User Interface, see Chapter 4,
“Operations,” on page 4-1.

The default library configuration settings are listed in Table 3-4.

Table 3-4. Default library configuration settings
Configuration Item Default Setting
NETWORK
Ethernet link speed Auto
SSL security Disabled
IPv4 settings Enabled
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Enabled
Protocol)
Static IP address Disabled
IPv4 address 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway 0.0.0.0
IPv6 settings Disabled
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Enabled
Protocol)
Stateless auto-configuration Enabled
Static IP address Disabled
IPv6 address 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Prefix length 64
Gateway 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
DNS setting Disabled
DNS IP address 0.0.0.0
PHYSICAL
Library name (Blank)
Auto Cleaning Disabled
Bar code label length 8 characters
LOGICAL

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-15

 Table 3-4. Default library configuration settings (continued)
Configuration Item Default Setting
Library mode Random
Loop Enabled
Auto Load Enabled
Active slots 9+0
| ENCRYPTION (S5H AND S4H ONLY)
Encryption method None
Encryption policy Encrypt All
SSL security Disabled
Primary EKM server address 0.0.0.0
Primary EKM TCP port number 3801
Primary EKM SSL port number 443
Secondary EKM server address 0.0.0.0
Secondary EKM TCP port number 3801
Secondary EKM SSL port number 443
Advanced encryption settings (None)
DATE and TIME
NTP server Disabled
NTP server address 0.0.0.0
Time zone (GMT) +00:00
| Date (MM/DD/YYYY) 01/08/2008
Auto adjustment by PC Every 1 minute
NOTIFICATIONS
SMTP (mail) settings
Mail server address 0.0.0.0
Mail event Error events enabled
SNMP (trap) settings
Community Public
Trap event Error events enabled
SNMPv3 engine ID (Set by library firmware)

Static library network settings must be entered using the Operator Panel before the
library can be accessed remotely using the Web User Interface. If your system is
serviced by a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server, the network
parameters will be automatically set. Once remote access has been established, you
can complete the configuration of your library remotely.

If you choose to use the Operator Panel to configure your library, go to

“Configuring Your Library using the Operator Panel” on page 3-31.

3-16 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface
If you choose to use the Web User Interface to configure your library, first enter
your library network settings using the Operator Panel (see “Configuring Network
Settings” on page 3-31).

To configure your library using the Web User Interface:

1. Install Java 1.5.0 or higher on your host computer. Download the latest
version of the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) for your platform from
http://www.java.com/.
2. “Logging in to the Web User Interface”
3. “Checking Firmware Level” on page 3-19
4. “Configuring Library Settings” on page 3-19
5. “Configuring Network Settings” on page 3-21
6. “Configuring Date and Time Settings” on page 3-22
7. “Configuring Encryption Settings” on page 3-24
8. “Configuring E-mail Notifications” on page 3-26
9. “Configuring Trap Notifications” on page 3-27
10. “Managing User Access” on page 3-29
11. “Saving the Library Configuration” on page 3-30

Logging in to the Web User Interface

To log in to the Web User Interface:
1. If necessary, obtain the IP address of the library on the Operator Panel.
a. From the top menu of the Operator Panel, press the Minus key to select
View Current Information, and press Enter.
b. Press the Minus key until the IP Address setting is displayed and make a
note of the IP address.
c. Press the Cancel key repeatedly to log out of the Operator Panel.
2. Open Internet Explorer on your server or PC to access the Web User Interface.
3. In the browser address field, enter your library's IP Address URL to launch the
Web User Interface applet in the browser window. For example,
http://192.168.1.1
When the applet launches, the warning message in Figure 3-16 on page 3-18
appears. This message is normal and does not indicate a problem.
4. Click Run. To bypass the security warning message each time you start a new
browser session, click the Always trust content from this publisher checkbox.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-17

 a29z0160
Figure 3-16. Java security warning message

5. On the Web User Interface login screen, enter the administrator login account
name and default password:
v Account: admin
v Password: secure

a29z0099

Figure 3-17. Web User Interface login screen

6. Click Login.

3-18 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Checking Firmware Level

a29z0114

Figure 3-18. System summary

| To determine the latest supported firmware level:

| 1. Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral.
| 2. Select Storage Systems from the Product Group menu.
| 3. Select Tape Systems from the Product Family menu.
| 4. Select the appropriate link from the Product Type menu. For example, select
| Tape autoloaders and libraries from the Product Type menu, then TS2900
| Autoloader from the Product menu to find links to updates.

Check the current level of library firmware displayed in the System Summary. If
an updated level of firmware is available, download and update the library
firmware before normal operation starts. See “Updating Library and Drive
Firmware” on page 4-36.

Configuring Library Settings

Logical Library Settings
a29z0124

Figure 3-19. Logical library mode settings

To configure the library access mode settings for the logical library:
1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click Logical in the left navigation
pane of the Web User Interface.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-19

 2. Select the Library Mode.
v Random - In random mode, the library allows the server's (host's)
application software to select any data cartridge in any order.
v Sequential - In sequential mode, the library's firmware predefines the
selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the library
to select the first available cartridge found (counting from the lowest
Column/Tier position through the highest cartridge position in your library)
for loading into the drive. See “Location Coordinates and Element
Addresses” on page 1-9.
| – Loop - Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the
| lowest Column/Tier cartridge position after the cartridge in the highest
| Column/Tier cartridge position has been filled with data and sent back to
| its home position. This allows endless backup operations without user
| interaction.
| – Autoload - Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first
| available cartridge (the lowest Column/Tier cartridge position that
| contains a cartridge) automatically if the library powers ON, or resets,
| with an empty drive. If the library powers ON with a cartridge already in
| the drive, sequential mode will start from the home position of that
| cartridge, unless the host issues a rewind and unload command to the
| drive, in which case the next cartridge in sequence will be loaded into the
| drive.
| To start sequential mode if autoload is OFF, use the Move Cartridge
| command to load the first cartridge into the drive. The sequence starts from
| the home position of that cartridge. Cartridges need not be in contiguous
| slots.
| To stop sequential mode, use the Move Cartridge command to unload the
| drive. This cancels sequential mode; the next sequential cartridge is NOT
| loaded.
| To restart sequential mode, use the Move Cartridge command again to load a
| cartridge; the loading sequence will resume from the home position of that
| cartridge.
| v Number of active slots - Select the number of active slots you would like to
assign in your library. Selecting the number of active slots defines the
number of storage slots, number of cleaning/inactive slots, whether the I/O
Station is enabled/disabled, and whether auto cleaning is allowed. The first
digit configures the number of active storage positions (4, 6, 8, or 9). The
second digit configures Column 5, Tier 1 of the magazine as an I/O Station
(0 when disabled, and 1 when enabled). The Auto Cleaning function can be
enabled only if there is at least 1 inactive position in the magazine. If Auto
Cleaning is enabled, the inactive positions become cleaning cartridge
positions.
3. Click Submit to enable the settings.

3-20 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Physical Library Settings

a29z0123
Figure 3-20. Cartridge assignment settings

To configure the library cartridge assignment settings, complete the following

procedure:
1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Physical in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Select the Library settings.
v Library name - Enter a name for your library.
v Auto Cleaning - Automatically cleans the drive when the drive requests
cleaning and a cleaning cartridge is present in the library. Auto cleaning can
be enabled only when there is at least 1 inactive position in the magazine in
the library.
v Bar code label length - Use to choose the number of characters in the
cartridge bar code that is reported to the host computer.
3. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Configuring Network Settings

a29z0125

Figure 3-21. Network settings

Once the network settings have been entered on the Operator Panel, the current
network configuration of the library can be modified using the Web User Interface.
The changes made to the network settings do not take affect until after the library
is rebooted.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-21

 To modify the network settings:
1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Network in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Select the Ethernet Link speed (duplex mode).
3. Select the TCP/IP settings. To enable dual IPv4/IPv6 protocol, select both Use
IPv4 and Use IPv6 and enter parameters for both.
v Security - Select Enable SSL for Web to provide secure communications
between the web browser and the tape library.
v IPv4 setting - Select Use IPv4 to enable the IPv4 Internet Protocol. Select the
corresponding radio button to obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP) or
| use static IP address settings. When using DHCP, use the Operator Panel to
| determine the library's assigned IP address. See “Viewing Current
| Information” on page 4-3. Enter the following parameters if using static IP
address settings.
– IPv4 address - Sets the TCP/IPv4 address of the library on the network.
– Subnet mask - Defines and limits users within a local network.
– Gateway - Allows access outside the local network.
v IPv6 setting - Select Use IPv6 to enable the IPv6 Internet Protocol. Select the
corresponding radio button to obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP), to
obtain an IP address using stateless auto configuration, or use static IP
address settings. Enter the following parameter if using static IP address
settings.
– IPv6 address - Sets the TCP/IPv6 address of the library on the network.
– Prefix length - Decimal value indicating the number of contiguous,
high-order bits comprising the network portion of the address.
– Gateway - Allows access outside the local network.
v DNS setting - Select Use DNS to use a domain name server. The DNS
server, if entered, allows the encryption, date and time, and notifications IP
addresses to be specified using hostnames instead of numerical IP addresses.
– DNS IP address - Sets the IP address of the DNS server.
4. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Configuring Date and Time Settings

a29z0170

Figure 3-22. Date and Time settings

Configure the date and time settings using one of three methods: automatically
using a remote NTP time server on the network, automatically using your the
clock on your host computer, or manually.

| Note: Selecting the Refresh button will refresh the date and time.

3-22 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| Note: If you choose to manually set your date and time, you will need to reset the
| date and time after power cycling the library and after a library reset.

Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is OFF
before powering ON again.

Once the network settings have been entered on the Operator Panel, the current
date and time can be modified using the Web User Interface.

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader communicates with an NTP server with the following
conditions:
v Client-server basis operation
v UDP (User Datagram Protocol) to access the NTP server
v Does not use authentication keys
v Library polling is every 12 hours

To modify the date and time settings:

1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Date and Time in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Select the Date and Time settings.
v NTP Server - Enables time and date control using a time server on the
network.
– NTP server address - Enter the IP address of the time server. IPv4 and
IPv6 addresses are supported, depending on the TCP/IP settings.
Hostnames can be entered instead of numerical IP addresses if Use DNS
is selected in the Network settings.
– Time zone - Enter the time zone relative to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
v If the time server is disabled, enter the local time and date manually.
– Date - Enter the date using the MM/DD/YYYY format.
– Time - Enter the time using the HH:MM:SS format.
v Auto Adjustment by PC - Select a time interval and click Start to
synchronize the library with the clock on your host computer at regular
intervals. The Web User Interface Java Applet must be running continuously
to use this function.
3. Click Submit to update the settings.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-23

 Configuring Encryption Settings

a29z0126
Figure 3-23. Encryption settings

| Note: This is an optional procedure if you have purchased the Encryption

| Activation Key Feature Code 5901. Only the Ultrium 5 Tape Drive
| (3572-S5H) and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive (3572-S4H) supports encryption.

Before you can use the encryption capability of the tape drive, you must be sure
that certain software and hardware requirements are met. Refer to the IBM
Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform, Introduction, Planning, and
User's Guide before continuing to the next step.

3-24 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a29z0171
Figure 3-24. Encryption enabled settings

To modify the encryption settings:

1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Encryption in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Enter the Encryption Activation Key and click Submit to enable encryption in
your library.
3. Select the Security settings.
v Enable SSL for EKM - Select to enable secure communications between the
tape library and the EKM server.
4. Select the Encryption method settings.
v Application Managed Encryption - For encryption in operating
environments that run an application capable of generating and managing
encryption policies and keys. If you select application-managed encryption,
no further configuration steps are necessary.
v System Managed Encryption - For encryption in operating environments
where no application is capable of key management runs, and encryption is
set up implicitly through each instance of the IBM device driver.
v Library Managed Encryption - For transparent encryption by the TS2900
Tape Autoloader tape drive.

Note: System managed tape encryption and library managed tape encryption
are transparent to one another. A tape encrypted using system managed
encryption may be decrypted using library managed encryption, and
vice versa, provided both have access to the same EKM keystore.
5. Select the Primary EKM Server Settings (library-managed encryption only) - The
address of the primary encryption key manager on a server. IPv4 and IPv6
addresses are supported. Hostnames can be entered instead of numerical IP
addresses if the DNS server is specified.
v Address - The IP address of the primary encryption key manager.
v TCP port number - The port number of the primary encryption key manager
for TCP. The default port number is 3801.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-25

 v SSL port number - The port number of the primary encryption key manager
for SSL. The default port number is 443.
6. Select the Secondary EKM Server Settings (library-managed encryption only) -
The address of the secondary encryption key manager on a server. IPv4 and
IPv6 addresses are supported. Hostnames can be entered instead of numerical
IP addresses if the DNS server is specified.
v Address - The IP address of the secondary encryption key manager.
v TCP port number - The port number of the secondary encryption key
manager for TCP. The default port number is 3801.
v SSL port number - The port number of the secondary encryption key
manager for SSL. The default port number is 443.
7. Select the Encryption policy settings (library-managed encryption only).
v Encrypt All - All tape cartridges loaded into the tape drive are encrypted.
v Internal Label - Selective Encryption - This option is used only for
Symantec's Veritas NetBackup.
v Internal Label - Encrypt All - This option is used only for Symantec's Veritas
NetBackup.
8. Skip over the Advanced Encryption Settings. The purpose of these advanced
encryption settings is to allow only IBM Support personnel (under the direction
of the drive development team) to provide a solution to an unforeseen problem
or to support a unique configuration. These options are not intended for use by
the customer without the guidance of IBM Technical Support.
9. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Configuring E-mail Notifications

a29z0127

Figure 3-25. E-mail notifications

Note: This is an optional procedure.

To set up e-mail notifications of library events:

3-26 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Notifications in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Click on the SMTP (Mail) Settings tab.
3. Configure the SMTP server and header settings.
v SMTP server address - SMTP mail server address. IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
are supported. Hostnames can be entered instead of numerical IP addresses
if the DNS server is specified in the Network settings.
v Sender address - Mail header information.
v Subject - Mail header information.
4. Enter the e-mail addresses to be notified when an event takes place in the Mail
To fields.
5. Select the event level to report in the Mail Event field.
6. Click Test to send a test e-mail message to the enabled addresses.
7. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Configuring Trap Notifications

a29z0128

Figure 3-26. Trap notifications

| Note: This is an optional procedure. SNMP notifications are not enabled unless
| there is a checkmark in the SNMP Enabled checkbox. To disable SNMP
| notifications, clear the SNMP Enable checkbox and click the Submit button.

The traps supported by the TS2900 Tape Autoloader are listed in “Trap Definitions
(Types)” on page B-13.

To set up trap notifications for an SNMP server:

1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Notifications in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Click on the SNMP Settings tab.
| 3. Click to place a checkmark in the SNMP Enabled checkbox.
4. Configure the SNMP server and header settings.
Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-27
 v Community - SNMP community name to which the library belongs.
v Name - Unique SNMP name for the system.
v Location - Physical location of the system.
v Contact - Contact person's name.
v SNMPv3 engine ID - A read-only attribute identifying the SNMPv3 engine.
5. Enter the trap IP addresses of the SNMP monitoring stations to be notified
when an event takes place and the security settings in the Trap List pop-up
menu.

a29z0140

Figure 3-27. Trap list settings

v Validity - Enable/Disable setting.

v Trap version - v1, v2c, or v3. For v2c and v3, the Inform checkbox
determines whether an SNMP INFORM request is sent instead of a trap
event.
v IP address - IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported. Hostnames can be
entered instead of numerical IP addresses if the DNS server is specified.
v Community (v1 or v2c) - SNMP community name.
v User name (v3 only) - SNMPv3 unique user name.
v Authentication (v3 only) - Authentication algorithm, MD5 or SHA. When an
algorithm is specified, an authentication password and confirmation of the
password are required.
v Privacy (v3 only) - Privacy service encryption and decryption algorithm, DES
or AES. When an algorithm is specified, a privacy password and
confirmation of the password are required.
6. Enter the SNMPv3 users who are permitted to access the tape library in the
SNMPv3 User List pop-up menu.

3-28 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a29z0141
Figure 3-28. SNMPv3 user list settings

v Validity - Enable/Disable setting.

v User name - SNMPv3 unique user name.
v Authentication - Authentication algorithm, MD5 or SHA. When an algorithm
is specified, an authentication password and confirmation of the password
are required.
v Privacy - Privacy service encryption and decryption algorithm, DES or AES.
When an algorithm is specified, a privacy password and confirmation of the
password are required.
7. Select the event level to report in the Trap event field.
8. Click Test to send a test trap notification to the enabled IP addresses.
9. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Managing User Access

a29z0122

Figure 3-29. User access settings

Note: This is an optional procedure.

To add users able to access the library using the Web User Interface:
1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on User Access in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Select the Add action in the pop-up menu.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-29

 v Add - To add new users.
v Modify - To change the selected user's access role and/or password.
v Remove - To delete the selected user from the system.

a29z0139
Figure 3-30. Add User dialog

3. Enter the user name and password information in the dialog box.
4. Assign a user access role.
v User - User access permission allows users to monitor the library, but not to
perform functions that affect the library.
v Superuser - Superuser access permission allows users to operate the physical
and logical library, but not to change configuration settings.
v Administrator - Administrator access permission allows users to perform
tape library functions and change configuration settings.
5. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Saving the Library Configuration

a29z0129

Figure 3-31. Save configuration

Note: This is a recommended procedure.

Each time you change the configuration of your library, you should save the
configuration. This function also allows you to maintain several library
configuration profiles that can be restored to the library when desired using the
Web User Interface.

To save library configuration:

1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Save/Restore in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Click Save to create a configuration file of your library on your computer.

3-30 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Configuring Your Library using the Operator Panel
To configure your library using the Operator Panel, complete the following
procedures:
1. “Logging in to the Operator Panel”
2. “Configuring Network Settings”
3. “Configuring Library Settings” on page 3-32

Logging in to the Operator Panel

In many environments, the default network settings may be sufficient to access
your tape library on a network. To change the default network settings using the
Operator Panel, complete the following procedure:
1. When the library is initialized, press the Enter key to move to the Password
screen.
2. Enter 0000, the default password. The top menu screen appears.
3. When finished using the Operator Panel, press Cancel to return to the top
menu screen.
4. When finished, press the Minus key to select Logout, and press Enter.

Configuring Network Settings

In many environments, the default network settings may be sufficient to access
your tape library on a network. To change the default network settings using the
Operator Panel, complete the following procedure:
1. From the top menu screen, press the Minus key to select Configuration, and
press Enter.
2. Link speed (Default: Auto Negotiation)
a. Select Configure Network Settings—>Configure Link Speed.
b. Select the required speed and press Enter.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
The speed must be set to Set Auto Negotiation for gigabit Ethernet
networks.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
3. DHCP IPv4 (Default: Enabled)
a. Select Configure Network Settings—>Configure DHCP—>Configure
DHCP IPv4.
b. Select Enable DHCP IPv4 and press Enter to enable, or press Down and
select Disable DHCP IPv4 to disable.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
4. DHCP IPv6 (Default: Disabled)
a. Select Configure Network Settings—>Configure DHCP—>Configure
DHCP IPv6.
b. Select Enable DHCP IPv6 and press Enter to enable, or press Down and
select Disable DHCP IPv6 to disable.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
5. IPv4/IPv6 Address (Default: 0.0.0.0). If DHCP is disabled, set the IP address
manually.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-31

 a. Select Configure Network Settings—>Change IP Address.
b. Select Set IP Address IPv4 to enter the IPv4 address of the tape library or
Set IP Address IPv6 to enter the IPv6 IP address (split over 4 screens).
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
6. IPv4 Subnet Mask (Default: 255.255.255.0). If DHCP IPv4 is disabled, set the
IPv4 subnet mask manually.
a. Select Configure Network Settings—>Change Subnet Mask—>Set
Subnet Mask.
b. Enter the IPv4 subnet mask.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
7. IPv6 Prefix Length (Default: 64). If DHCP IPv6 is disabled, set the IPv6 prefix
length manually.
a. Select Configure Network Settings—>Change Subnet Mask—>Set Prefix
Length.
b. Enter the IPv4 prefix length.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
8. IPv4/IPv6 Gateway (Default: 0.0.0.0). If DHCP is disabled, set the IP address
manually.
a. Select Configure Network Settings—>Change Gateway.
b. Select Set Gateway Address IPv4 to enter the IPv4 gateway address or Set
Gateway Address IPv6 to enter the IPv6 gateway address (split over 4
screens).
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
9. Press Cancel to return to the Network Settings menu.
10. Press Cancel to return to the Configuration menu.
11. Press Cancel to return to the top menu screen.

Configuring Library Settings

To configure the library settings, complete the following procedure:
1. From the top menu screen, press the Minus key to select Configuration, and
press Enter.
2. Select Configure Library, and press Enter.
3. I/O Station (Default: Disabled)
a. Select Configure Library—>Configure I/O Station.
b. Select Enable I/O Station to enable the 1-slot I/O Station or Disable I/O
Station to disable.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
4. Active Slots (Default: All)
a. Select Configure Library—>Set Active Slots Count.
b. Select the number of active slots you would like to assign for the logical
library.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.

3-32 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 5. Library Mode (Default: Random)
a. Select Configure Library—>Configure Library Mode.
b. Select Set Random Mode or Configure Sequential Mode, and press Enter.
Random - In random mode, the library allows the server's (host's)
application software to select any data cartridge in any order.
Sequential - In sequential mode, the library's firmware predefines the
selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the
library to select the first available cartridge found (counting from the lowest
Column/Tier position through the highest cartridge position in your library)
for loading into the drive.
| v Loop - Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the
| lowest Column/Tier cartridge position after the cartridge in the highest
| Column/Tier cartridge position has been filled with data and sent back to
| its home position. This allows endless backup operations without user
| interaction.
| v Autoload - Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first
| available cartridge (the lowest Column/Tier cartridge position that
| contains a cartridge) automatically if the library powers ON, or resets,
| with an empty drive. If the library powers ON with a cartridge already in
| the drive, sequential mode will start from the home position of that
| cartridge, unless the host issues a rewind and unload command to the
| drive, in which case the next cartridge in sequence will be loaded into the
| drive.
| To start sequential mode if autoload is OFF, use the Move Cartridge
| command to load the first cartridge into the drive. The sequence starts from
| the home position of that cartridge. Cartridges need not be in contiguous
| slots.
| To stop sequential mode, use the Move Cartridge command to unload the
| drive. This cancels sequential mode; the next sequential cartridge is NOT
| loaded.
| To restart sequential mode, use the Move Cartridge command again to load
| a cartridge; the loading sequence will resume from the home position of
| that cartridge.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
6. Date/Time - Enter the local time and date manually if you do not plan to use a
network-based time server.
a. Select Configure Library—>Configure Date/Time.
b. Select Set Date or Set Time, and press Enter.
v Date - Enter the date using the MM/DD/YYYY format.
v Time - Enter the time using the HH:MM:SS format.
c. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
7. Auto Cleaning (Default: Disabled)
a. Select Configuration—>Configure Auto Cleaning.
b. Select Enable Auto Cleaning or Disable Auto Cleaning, and press Enter.
The Auto Cleaning function can only be enabled if there is at least 1
inactive position in the magazine in the library.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-33

Populating the Library with Cartridges
The magazine is opened using the Operator Panel.

To populate the library with data and cleaning cartridges, complete the following
procedure:
1. From the top menu screen on the Operator Panel, press the Minus key to select
Unlock Magazine, and press Enter.
2. Insert cartridges in the magazine.

Note: A blue release gate (1 in Figure 3-32) in the top left corner of each
column in the cartridge magazine prevents each cartridge from falling
out of the front of the magazine. When manually releasing the gate with
one hand, position your other hand in front of the column opening to
prevent cartridges being ejected by the internal column spring.

a29z0101
1

Figure 3-32. Cartridge release gate

Note: Column 5 Tier 2 is reserved as the exchange position. This position is

accessible by the library only. A locking mechanism prevents insertion of
a cartridge into the reserved slot.
Each cartridge must be inserted with the indicator arrow on the leading edge of
the upper surface of the cartridge pointing towards the cartridge magazine (see
Figure 3-33 on page 3-35).

Note: Do not rely on the bar code label orientation, if attached, to provide an
indication of the correct cartridge orientation. The bar code label should
be right side up if attached correctly.

3-34 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 L T O 1 2 3 L4

a29z0056
Figure 3-33. Cartridge orientation

The Auto Cleaning function can be enabled only if the number of active slots is
less than the maximum available slots. The active slots are always enabled
starting with the lowest numerical cartridge position number in the magazine,
which is located at the drive end of the cartridge magazine. Place cleaning
cartridges in inactive cartridge positions for use by the auto cleaning function.
Do not store data or cleaning cartridges in the I/O Station (Column 5, Tier 1) if
the I/O Station is enabled.
3. Put the magazine back into the library and wait for the library inventory to
complete before proceeding to the next step.
4. Press Cancel to return to the top level menu.

Verifying Library and Drive Operation

To verify the library is operating correctly:
1. From the top menu screen on the Operator Panel, press the Minus key to select
Service, and press Enter.
2. Press the Minus key to select Diagnostics, and press Enter.
3. Select Run Library Verify, and press Enter. Follow the on-screen instructions.
If there is a cartridge in a drive, the library moves the cartridge to its home
position, or to the I/O Station if the home position is not known.
4. When prompted, insert a customer supplied scratch cartridge into the I/O
Station.
When the scratch cartridge is loaded, the bar code reader reads the bar code
label on the cartridge and stores it for later comparison. The cartridge is then
moved to the tape drive, where the drive runs its own write/read/verify test.
When the test is done, the library tells the drive to eject the cartridge, and then
the cartridge is moved back to the I/O Station. The bar code is read again and
compared with the value stored earlier.
5. When prompted, remove the cartridge from the I/O Station.
The result of the test is reported on the Operator Panel.
If an error occurs, note the error code number and see Appendix B, “Error
Codes,” on page B-1.
6. Press Cancel to return to the top level menu.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-35

 Taking the Library Online
When your library is completely configured, you are ready to save the library
configuration and take the library online.

Note: The tape drive is always online, regardless of whether the library is online
or offline.

To take the library online using the Operator Panel:

1. From the top menu screen, press the Minus key to select Commands, and press
Enter.
2. Select Change Library State, and press Enter.
3. Select Set Library Online, and press Enter.
4. Press Cancel repeatedly to return to the top level menu.
5. Press the Minus key to select Logout, and press Enter.

To take the library online using the Web User Interface:

1. Save the library configuration.
a. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Save/Restore in the
left navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
b. Click Save, and then enter a file name and select a location to save the
configuration file.
2. Verify the library state.
a. Click Library State in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
b. If the library is offline, click Bring Online.
c. Click Yes to confirm when prompted.
A message dialog appears when the operation is completed.
3. Click Logoff in the top right corner of the window.

Registering for Support Notification

| Support Notification registration provides email notification when new firmware
| levels have been updated and are available for download and installation.

| To register for Support Notification, visit the web at: http://www-01.ibm.com/

| software/support/einfo.html.

Enter your user name and password on the Appendix F, “Library Configuration
Form,” on page F-1.

| Note: Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together.
| When updating to the latest firmware, verify that all installed components
| such as the tape drive and library are at the latest levels noted on the
| Support web site. Mixing different levels of library and tape drive firmware
| is not supported and may cause unpredictable results.

IBM recommends that you update library and drive firmware when new levels
become available. For instructions on updating library and drive firmware, see
“Updating Library and Drive Firmware” on page 4-36.

Now you are ready to use your library.

3-36 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 4. Operations
Operator Panel Monitoring the Library “Viewing Configuration Settings” on page 4-3
“Viewing Current Information” on page 4-3
“Viewing Firmware Revision” on page 4-4
Managing the Library “Unlocking the I/O Station” on page 4-4
“Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine” on page 4-5
“Moving Cartridges” on page 4-5
“Unloading the Drive” on page 4-6
“Cleaning the Drive Manually” on page 4-6
“Conducting a Library Inventory” on page 4-6
“Taking the Library Online/Offline” on page 4-7
“Powering Down the Library” on page 4-7
“Preparing to Ship the Library” on page 4-7
“Rebooting the Drive” on page 4-8
“Rebooting the Library” on page 4-8
“Logging Out of the Library” on page 4-8
Configuring the Library “Configuring Auto Cleaning” on page 4-8
“Configuring the Number of Active Slots” on page 4-9
“Configuring the Library Access Mode” on page 4-9
“Configuring Date and Time Settings” on page 4-10
“Configuring Network Settings” on page 4-11
“Configuring Operator Panel Settings” on page 4-12
“Setting the Library to Factory Defaults” on page 4-12
Servicing the Library “Checking the Library Error Status” on page 4-13
“Running Library Verify Diagnostics” on page 4-13
“Running Drive Diagnostics” on page 4-14

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 4-1

 Web User Monitoring the Library “Viewing the System Summary” on page 4-16
Interface
“Viewing the Library Map” on page 4-17
Managing the Library “Moving Cartridges” on page 4-19
“Unloading Drive” on page 4-20
“Cleaning the Drive Manually” on page 4-20
“Taking the Library Online and Offline” on
page 4-20
“Conducting a Library Inventory” on page 4-21
Configuring the Library “Managing User Access” on page 4-21
“Configuring Physical Library Settings” on
page 4-22
“Configuring Logical Library Settings” on page
4-23
“Configuring Network Settings” on page 4-24
“Configuring Encryption Settings” on page 4-25
“Configuring Date and Time Settings” on page
4-27
“Configuring E-mail Notifications” on page
4-28
“Configuring SNMP Trap Notifications” on
page 4-29
“Saving and Restoring Configuration Settings”
on page 4-30
Servicing the Library “Running Encryption Key Path Diagnostics” on
page 4-32
“Viewing Operator Interventions” on page 4-33
“Viewing Library Logs” on page 4-33
“Viewing Trace Data” on page 4-35
“Downloading Drive Logs” on page 4-35
“Downloading Library Logs” on page 4-36
“Resetting the Library and Drives” on page
4-36
“Updating Library and Drive Firmware” on
page 4-36
“Viewing Accessor Statistics” on page 4-38

Using the Operator Panel

Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 shows the top level menu tree structure of the Operator
Panel on the front of the TS2900 Tape Autoloader. For details on how to select
commands and options, see the description in “Operator Panel” on page 2-1.

4-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Top Level Commands Configuration Service

Unlock I/O Station* Move Cartridge Configure Library View Error Status

Unlock Magazine Unload Configure Auto Cleaning Diagnostics

Commands Clean Drive Configure Network Settings View Firmware Revision

Configuration Inventory Configure Op Panel Settings Telnet Service Port*

View Current Information Move to Ship Position View Settings * For use by IBM Technical
Support only.
Service Reboot Drive Set Default

Logout Reboot Library

* If enabled. Change Library State

Figure 4-1. Operator Panel top menus

Monitoring the Library

Viewing Configuration Settings

Configuration

View Settings

Figure 4-2. Configuration settings

Use Configuration—>View Settings to display a list of the library configuration

settings.

The settings displayed comprises the following:

v Library settings
| – I/O Station (On/Off)
| – Auto cleaning (On/Off)
| – Number of cleaning slots when Auto cleaning is enabled
– Operator Panel back light setting
v Network settings
– Link speed
– IP address protocol
– IPv4 settings (IP address, subnet mask address, gateway address, DHCP)
| – IPv6 settings (IP address, gateway address, prefix length, DHCP, stateless
| Auto configuration)
v Drive settings
– Model number

Viewing Current Information

View Current Information

Figure 4-3. Current information

Use View Current Information to display the network settings information.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-3

 The settings displayed comprises the following:
v Network settings
– Worldwide node name
– IP address protocol stack
– IP address

Viewing Firmware Revision

Service

View Firmware Revision

Figure 4-4. Hardware attributes

Use Service—>View Firmware Revision to display the current version of the

library firmware.

Managing the Library

Unlocking the I/O Station

Unlock I/O Station

Figure 4-5. Unlock I/O Station command

Use Unlock I/O Station to unlock the I/O Station. This menu option is available
only when the I/O Station is enabled in the library configuration settings.

a29z0024

Figure 4-6. I/O Station unlocked

After closing the I/O Station, wait for the library to complete its inventory before
proceeding with normal library operations.

Note: A blue release gate in the top left corner of each column in the cartridge
magazine prevents each cartridge from falling out of the front of the

4-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 magazine. When manually releasing the gate with one hand, position your
other hand in front of the column opening to prevent cartridges being
ejected by the internal column spring.

Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine

Unlock Magazine

Figure 4-7. Unlock Magazine command

Use Unlock Magazine to unlock and remove the cartridge magazine.

When the cartridge magazine is unlocked, it can be removed from the library to
insert and/or remove data and cleaning cartridges. When the cartridge magazine is
fully inserted, the magazine locks into place.

After closing the magazine, wait for the library to complete its inventory before
proceeding with normal library operations.

Note: A blue release gate in the top left corner of each column in the cartridge
magazine prevents each cartridge from falling out of the front of the
magazine. When manually releasing the gate with one hand, position your
other hand in front of the column opening to prevent cartridges being
ejected by the internal column spring.

Moving Cartridges

Commands

Move Cartridge

Source Slot

Destination Slot

Figure 4-8. Move Cartridge command

Use Commands—>Move Cartridge to move data cartridges and cleaning

cartridges between the I/O Station, storage positions, and tape drive.

Specify the following parameters:

v Source Slot - Specify a source that contains a cartridge.
v Destination Slot - Specify the destination.

| Select the Enter key to move the cartridge from the source to the destination.

Note: Cartridges cannot be moved to the Accessor using this command, but can be
moved from the Accessor using this command if, for example, the library
was powered OFF with a tape still held in the Picker.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-5

 Unloading the Drive

Commands

Unload

Figure 4-9. Unload command

Use Commands—>Unload to unload the cartridge from the tape head mechanism.

| Unload when library is in Random mode: The cartridge in the drive is unloaded
| from the tape head mechanism, but is still retained inside the tape drive housing.
| The Move Cartridge command moves the cartridge from the drive to another
| location. Moving a tape cartridge from a drive to another location both unloads
| and moves the cartridge in a single action.

| Unload when library is in Sequential mode: The cartridge in the drive is unloaded
| from the tape head mechanism, and returned to the cartridge home position.

| Select the Enter key to unload the cartridge from the tape head mechanism.

Cleaning the Drive Manually

Commands

Clean Drive

Figure 4-10. Clean Drive command

Use Commands—>Clean Drive to clean the tape drive manually using a cleaning
cartridge located in either a cartridge storage position or the I/O Station.

| Select the Enter key to move the cleaning cartridge to the drive and start drive
| head cleaning. The cleaning cartridge is returned to its home position when
| cleaning is finished.

Conducting a Library Inventory

Commands

Inventory

Figure 4-11. Inventory command

Use Commands—>Inventory to force the library to execute an inventory of the

| cartridge magazine, accessor, and tape drive to refresh the library map. An
| inventory is conducted automatically when power is first turned ON or when the
| cartridge magazine is removed and reinserted.

| Select the Enter key to conduct the inventory.

4-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Taking the Library Online/Offline

Commands

Change Library State

Set Library Online

Set Library Offline

Figure 4-12. Online/Offline command

Use Commands—>Change Library State to take the library online or offline.

It is sometimes necessary to take the library offline before performing some

servicing functions for the library. Once these operations have finished, it is
necessary to bring the library back online.

Note: The tape drive is always online, even when the library is offline.

Powering Down the Library

Before powering OFF the library, make sure that the library is in an idle state with
no mechanical movement of the Accessor, and all data operations (for example,
backup operations, accessing of log files, and so on) have completed. Then, power
OFF the library using the power switch on the rear panel of the library.

Important: If you switch the library power OFF while the library is being accessed,
loss of data may occur.

Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is OFF
before powering ON again.

Preparing to Ship the Library

Commands

Move to Ship Position

Figure 4-13. Move to Ship Position command

Use Commands—>Move to Ship Position when preparing to move the library to

a new location. The Accessor must be placed in a parked position within the
library housing. Move to Ship Position finishes all active commands received from
the host application, does not process any new commands, and moves the
Accessor to the parked position before the power is turned OFF.
| 1. When Unlock Magazine is displayed, press the Enter key to unlock the
| cartridge magazine. The magazine will unlock and the display will prompt the
| removal of the magazine.
| 2. Remove all cartridges from the magazine and reinsert the magazine into the
| slide mechanism. The library will perform an inventory to verify no cartridges
| are in the magazine.
| 3. If the magazine is empty, the library will move the accessor to the ship
| position. At this point, the library can be powered down. If the magazine is
| NOT empty, the library will prompt to remove cartridges. After removing all
| cartridges and replacing the magazine, start the ship position process again.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-7

 Rebooting the Drive

Commands

Reboot Drive

Figure 4-14. Reboot Drive command

Use Commands—>Reboot Drive to force the drive to reboot. You also specify
whether the library should come online/offline after it finishes rebooting.

| Select the Enter key to reboot the drive.

Rebooting the Library

Commands

Reboot Library

Figure 4-15. Reboot Library command

Use Commands—>Reboot Library to force the library to reboot. You also specify
whether the library should come online or offline after it finishes rebooting.

| Select the Enter key to reboot the library.

Logging Out of the Library

Logout

Figure 4-16. Logout command

Use Logout to logout of the library. The login screen is displayed for the next user.

Configuring the Library

Configuring Auto Cleaning

Configuration

Configure Auto Cleaning

Enable Auto Cleaning

Disable Auto Cleaning

Figure 4-17. Auto Cleaning settings

Use Configuration—>Configure Auto Cleaning to enable or disable automatic

head cleaning of the tape drive in the library.

The drive can also be cleaned manually. For details, see “Cleaning the Drive
Manually” on page 4-20.

4-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Configuring the Number of Active Slots

Configuration

Configure Library

Set Active Slots Count

Active Slots

Figure 4-18. Active slot count settings

Use Configuration—>Configure Library—>Set Active Slots Count to set the

number of active data cartridge positions within the logical library.

Configure the number of active slots using the following setting:

v Active Slots - The maximum number of active slots that can be set is dependent
upon the I/O Station configuration and Auto Cleaning setting.

The active cartridge slots always begin with the cartridge position with the lowest
cartridge address within the logical library.

Configuring the Library Access Mode

Configuration

Configure Library

Configure Library Mode

Set Random Mode

Set Sequential Mode

Configure Loop Mode

Enable Loop Mode

Disable Loop Mode

Configure Autoload Mode

Enable Autoload Mode

Disable Autoload Mode

Figure 4-19. Library access mode settings

Use Configuration—>Configure Library—>Configure Library Mode to set the

logical library access mode.

Configure the library access mode using the following settings:

v Random Mode - In random mode, the library allows the server's (host's)
application software to select any data cartridge in any order.
v Sequential Mode - In sequential mode, the library's firmware predefines the
selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the library to
select the first available cartridge found (counting from the lowest Column/Tier
position through the highest cartridge position in your library) for loading into
the drive.
| – Loop - Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the lowest
| Column/Tier cartridge position after the cartridge in the highest Column/Tier

Chapter 4. Operations 4-9

| cartridge position has been filled with data and sent back to its home
| position. This allows endless backup operations without user interaction.
| – Autoload - Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first available
| cartridge (the lowest Column/Tier cartridge position that contains a cartridge)
| automatically if the library powers ON, or resets, with an empty drive. If the
| library powers ON with a cartridge already in the drive, sequential mode will
| start from the home position of that cartridge, unless the host issues a rewind
| and unload command to the drive, in which case the next cartridge in
| sequence will be loaded into the drive.
| To start sequential mode if autoload is OFF, use the Move Cartridge command
| to load the first cartridge into the drive. The sequence starts from the home
| position of that cartridge. Cartridges need not be in contiguous slots.
| To stop sequential mode, use the Move Cartridge command to unload the drive.
| This cancels sequential mode; the next sequential cartridge is NOT loaded.
| To restart sequential mode, use the Move Cartridge command again to load a
| cartridge; the loading sequence will resume from the home position of that
| cartridge.

Configuring Date and Time Settings

Configuration

Configure Library

Configure Date/Time

Set Date

Set Time

Figure 4-20. Date and Time settings

Use Configuration—>Configure Library—>Configure Date/Time to set the date

and time on your library manually after a power disruption and when daylight
savings time starts and ends. The date is set in MM/DD/YYYY format, and the
time is set in 24-hour HH:MM:SS format.

The current date and time can also be controlled automatically using a
network-based Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings” on page 4-11.

4-10 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Configuring Network Settings

Configuration

Configure Network Settings

Configure Link Speed

Set Auto Negotiation

Set 10 Base-T Full

Set 10 Base-T Half

Set 100 Base-T Full

Set 100 Base-T Half

Configure DHCP

Configure DHCP IPv4

Enable DHCP IPv4

Disable DHCP IPv4

Configure DHCP Ipv6

Enable DHCP IPv6

Disable DHCP Ipv6

Change IP Address

Set IP Address Ipv4 Input IP Address

Set IP Address Ipv6 Input IP Address x 4

Change Subnet Mask

Set Subnet Mask Input Subnet Mask

Set Prefix Length Input Prefix

Change Gateway

Set Gateway Address Ipv4 Input Gateway

Set Gateway Address Ipv6 Input Gateway x 4

Figure 4-21. Network settings

Use Configuration—>Configure Network Settings to set the network settings for

the library.

Note: The internet protocol (IPv4, IPv6 or dual IPv4/IPv6) selection is used for the
TS2900 Tape Autoloader IP address, subnet mask, gateway address, time
server address, mail server address, SNMP trap address, and EKM server
addresses.

Configure the network using the following settings:

v Link Speed - Ethernet duplex mode (Auto, 10Base-T Full, 10Base-T Half,
100Base-TX Full, 100Base-TX Half).
v DHCP - (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Enable DHCP to have the
library server or router negotiate the connection with the library.
– IPv4 - Select to enable DHCP using the IPv4 protocol.
– IPv6 - Select to enable DHCP using the IPv6 protocol
v IP Address - If DHCP is disabled, set the IP address of the library manually.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-11

 – IPv4 - Select to enter the library IP address using the IPv4 protocol.
– IPv6 - Select to enter four library IP addresses using the IPv6 protocol.
v Subnet Mask - If DHCP is disabled, set the IP address of the subnet mask.
– Subnet Mask - Select to enter the subnet mask address using the IPv4
protocol.
– Prefix Length - Select to enter the prefix length for the IPv6 protocol.
v Gateway - If DHCP is disabled, set the IP address of the gateway.
– IPv4 - Select to enter the gateway IP address using the IPv4 protocol.
– IPv6 - Select to enter four gateway IP addresses using the IPv6 protocol.

Configuring Operator Panel Settings

Configuration

Configure Op Panel Settings

Configure LCD Back Light

Enable Auto Back Light

Input Count (min)

Disable Auto Back Light

Change Login Password

New Password

Reenter Password

Figure 4-22. Operator Panel settings

Use Configuration—>Configure Op Panel Settings to set the preferences when

using the Operator Panel.

Configure the Operator Panel using the following settings:

v Back light - Select to enable the LCD back light when using the Operator Panel.
– Input Count - If the auto back light is enabled, specify the time duration
before the back light turns OFF. The setting uses a 4-digit timer in minutes.
v Login Password - Select to change the Operator Panel 4-character login
password. The new password must be re-entered for confirmation before the
password is changed (default: 0000).

Setting the Library to Factory Defaults

Configuration

Set Default

Figure 4-23. Factory default settings

Use Configuration—>Set Default to reset the library to the factory default

settings. See Table 3-4 on page 3-15. The date and time must be reset after restoring
factory default settings. See “Configuring Date and Time Settings” on page 4-10.

Important: This configuration setting deletes all current library settings, and
should be used with utmost caution.

4-12 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 To restore your library configuration, see “Saving and Restoring Configuration
Settings” on page 4-30.

Servicing the Library

The Service menu on the Operator Panel gives users access to troubleshooting and
maintenance diagnostic tools.

Checking the Library Error Status

Service

View Error Status

View Library Error Status

View Drive Error Status

Figure 4-24. Error status menu

Use Service—>View Error Status to check the current status of the major library
components.

Select the component to view its error status:

v Library - Checks the error status of the library.
v Drive - Checks the error status of the tape drive.

If an error occurs, press the Enter key to display specific error information. You can
check the meaning of error codes in Appendix B, “Error Codes,” on page B-1.

Running Library Verify Diagnostics

Service

Diagnostics

Run Library Verify

Figure 4-25. Library Verify diagnostics

Use Service—>Diagnostics—>Run Library Verify to test the library and drive

hardware, communications, and the read/write capability of the library. Library
Verify is the most critical and most frequently used test, and should be executed
after all maintenance procedures to ensure correct library performance.

Note: Running the Library Verify diagnostic test will unload tape cartridges in the
drives if the host application has not already done so.

To run library verification diagnostic tests:

1. Select Run Library Verify, and press Enter. Follow the on-screen instructions.
| If there is a cartridge in the drive, the library moves the cartridge to its home
| position, or to the I/O Station if the home position is not known.
2. When prompted, insert a scratch cartridge into the I/O Station.
When the scratch cartridge is loaded, an inventory is conducted and the bar
code reader reads the bar code label on the cartridge and stores it for later
comparison. The scratch cartridge is then moved to the tape drive, where the
drive runs its own write/read/verify test. When the test is done, the library

Chapter 4. Operations 4-13

 tells the drive to eject the scratch cartridge, and then the cartridge is moved
back to the I/O Station. The bar code is read again and compared with the
value stored earlier.
3. When prompted, remove the scratch cartridge from the I/O Station.
The result of the test (PASSED or error message) is reported on the Operator
Panel.
4. View the Error Log to check if any errors occur.
If an error occurs, see Appendix B, “Error Codes,” on page B-1 to identify and
locate the problem.

Running Drive Diagnostics

Service

Diagnostics

Drive Diagnostics

Run Normal Read/Write Test

Run Perform Read/Write Test

Run Media Test

Run Head Test

Run SAS Wrap Test

Figure 4-26. Drive diagnostics

Use Service—>Diagnostics—>Drive Diagnostics to run various drive-related

diagnostic tests.

To run drive diagnostic tests:

1. Select Drive Diagnostics, and press Enter. Select one of the diagnostic tests and
follow the on-screen instructions.
2. When prompted, insert a scratch (blank) cartridge into the I/O Station.
| v Normal R/W Test - Runs a shortened version of the Performance R/W Test.
| It does not include the POST diagnostic, calibrate drive, or unique tape
| motion tests. It checks the motors and head by running read/write tests on a
| shortened section of tape, both inbound and outbound. Takes approximately
| 4 minutes (if no error occurs) to 9 minutes (if calibration is required).
v Perform. R/W Test (Performance R/W Test) - Runs most of the tests that
normally occur when the library is powered ON (POST). When prompted,
load a CE scratch cartridge to run the calibrate drive, read/write, and tape
motion tests. These tests calibrate the read/write channel to optimum
settings, run a long read/write test using all servo positions, and exercise all
of the tape motion functions of the drive. Takes up to 30 minutes.
v Media Test - Runs tests on a tape cartridge. When prompted, insert the
cartridge to test into the I/O Station. This test overwrites any data on the
cartridge. It runs read/write tests on the outer tracks of the tape to verify the
media tracking and performance. Takes approximately 9 minutes.
v Head Test - Runs read/write tests on the tape drive head. When prompted,
insert a scratch cartridge into the I/O Station. It runs read/write tests on the
inner tracks of the tape to verify the head performance. Takes approximately
6 minutes.

4-14 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v SAS Wrap Test - Runs tests on the SAS interface SCSI controller. Remove the
SAS cable from the library and insert the SAS wrap tool (see Figure 4-27) into
the SAS host connector. Start the SAS wrap test. If the wrap test fails, contact
your next level of support.

Figure 4-27. SAS wrap tool a29z0053

3. When prompted, remove the cartridge from the I/O Station.

The result of the test (PASSED or error message) is reported on the Operator
Panel.
4. View the Error Log to check if any errors occur.
If an error occurs, see Appendix B, “Error Codes,” on page B-1 to identify and
locate the problem.

Using the Web User Interface

Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 shows all the menu options available from the Web User
Interface for the Administrator User account. For information on the menu user
access privileges for User, Superuser, and Administrator accounts, see “User
Privileges” on page 2-8.

Monitor Library Manage Library Configure Library Service Library

System Summary Move Cartridges User Access Key Path Diagnostics

Library Map Unload Physical Operator Interventions

Clean Drive Logical View Library Logs

Library State Network Traced

Inventory Encryption Download Drive Logs

Date and Time Download Library Logs

Notifications Reset Library/Drive

Save/Restore Firmware Update

Usage Statistics

Figure 4-28. Web User Interface menu

Chapter 4. Operations 4-15

 Monitoring the Library
Viewing the System Summary

a29z0114

Figure 4-29. System Summary screen

Use Monitor Library—>System Summary to display a summary of the current

status of the tape drive and the library, and the current configuration of the library,
comprising:
v Library name
| v Library status (OK, Degraded, or Failed). It displays Not Ready while
| initializing.
| v Drive status (OK, Degraded, or Failed). It displays Empty, Loading, or Ejected
| when the drive is empty, loading media, or media is ejected/unloaded in the
| drive. It displays Cleaning when the cleaning cartridge is in the drive, and
| Initializing while initializing.
v I/O Station status (Open/Closed, when I/O Station is enabled)
v Operator Panel LED indicators
v Number of cartridges and slot configuration
– Cartridge in the drive (0 or 1); Slots value is always “N/A”
– Number of cartridges in the active slots; Number of active slots
| – Number of cartridges in the cleaning/inactive slots; Number of
| cleaning/inactive slots
– Number of cartridges in the I/O Station (0 or 1) when enabled; Number of
I/O Station slots
– Number of cartridges in the reserved slot; Number of reserved slots
v Library firmware version
v Library serial number
v Drive firmware version

4-16 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Viewing the Library Map

a29z0115
Figure 4-30. Library Map screen

Use Monitor Library—>Library Map to display a graphical view of the library.

Each component of the library is represented by a clickable icon. Select a
component in the library map to display detailed information for that component
of the library on the right side of the page. A grayed out column represents the
I/O Station. The information displayed varies according to the type of device
selected:
v Library information
– Accessor status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
| – Drive Status (OK, Degraded, or Failed). Drive Status displays Empty,
| Loading, or Ejected when the drive is empty, loading media, or media is
| ejected/unloaded in the drive. It displays Cleaning when the cleaning
| cartridge is in the drive, and Initializing while initializing.
– I/O Station (Enabled or Disabled)
– Auto cleaning (Enabled or Disabled)
– Magazine status (Inserted or Open)
| – Library mode (Random or Sequential). In Sequential mode, Loop and Auto
| load mode are also displayed.
| v Ethernet information
| – Status
| – Protocol
| – IP addresses
| – DHCP (Enabled or Disabled)
| – Subnet mask
| – Gateway address
| – Library Worldwide node name
| – MAC address
| – Link speed

Chapter 4. Operations 4-17

| – NTP server
| – SNMP trap
| – E-mail address
v Cartridge
– Cartridge label detected by the bar code reader
| – Encryption setting (for data cartridges)
– Media status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
| – Remaining uses for cleaning cartridges. When a cleaning cartridge is added to
| the library (I/O Station or cleaning slot) the remaining uses will be displayed
| as 50. The actual remaining uses will be updated when the cleaning cartridge
| is loaded into the tape drive. See “Cleaning Cartridge” on page 5-4.
v Column n, Tier n
| – Slot type (Storage, I/O Station, or Cleaning)
– Element address
v Drive information
| – Status (OK, Degraded, or Failed). Drive Status displays Empty, Loading, or
| Ejected when the drive is empty, loading media, or media is ejected/unloaded
| in the drive. It displays Cleaning when the cleaning cartridge is in the drive,
| and Initializing while initializing.
– Vendor ID
– Product ID
– Firmware version
– Serial number
– World wide node name
| – Encryption capability
| – Drive event
| – Cartridge information
v Accessor information
– Status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
– Accessor event

4-18 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Managing the Library
Moving Cartridges

a29z0116
Figure 4-31. Move Cartridges screen

Use Manage Library—>Move Cartridges to move data and cleaning cartridges

between the I/O Station, storage positions, inactive slots, and tape drive. Move
cartridges by clicking and dragging a cartridge from one location to another, or by
right-clicking a cartridge and selecting a destination.

Select a cartridge to display information for that cartridge in the Source pane on
the right side of the page. Drag the cartridge to a valid destination location to
display information in the Destination pane. Release the mouse button to execute
the move.

The following information is displayed:

v Source
– Location coordinates in the library (Column, Tier)
– Slot type (Storage, I/O Station, or Cleaning)
– Element address
– Cartridge label
– Encryption capability for storage cartridges
| – Remaining uses for cleaning cartridges. When a cleaning cartridge is added to
| the library (I/O Station or cleaning slot) the remaining uses will be displayed
| as 50. The actual remaining uses will be updated when the cleaning cartridge
| is loaded into the tape drive. See “Cleaning Cartridge” on page 5-4.
– Media status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
v Destination
| – Location coordinates in the library (Column, Tier)
– Status (for the tape drive)
– Slot type and element address

Chapter 4. Operations 4-19

 Note: Each column has a spring loaded mechanism that pushes the cartridges into
Tier 1. Moving a second cartridge into a column moves the first cartridge
into Tier 2. Also, cartridges cannot be moved directly from Tier 1 in one
column to Tier 2 in another column in a single move operation (intermediate
move operations are required).

Note: Cartridges cannot be moved to the Accessor using this command, however,
but can be moved from the Accessor using this command if, for example,
the library was powered OFF with a cartridge still held in the Accessor.

Unloading Drive

Figure 4-32. Unload Drive screen

Use Manage Library—>Unload Drive and click Unload to unload the tape
cartridge from the tape drive head.

| Unload when library is in Random mode: The cartridge in the drive is unloaded
| from the tape head mechanism, but is still retained inside the tape drive housing.
| The Move Cartridge command moves the cartridge from the drive to another
| location. Moving a tape cartridge from a drive to another location both unloads
| and moves the cartridge in a single action.

| Unload when library is in Sequential mode: The cartridge in the drive is unloaded
| from the tape head mechanism, and returned to the cartridge home position

Cleaning the Drive Manually

Figure 4-33. Clean Drive screen

Use Manage Library—>Clean Drive to clean a drive manually. Select a cleaning

cartridge to use (from the magazine or from the I/O Station), and click Clean.

The cleaning cartridge is returned to its home position when cleaning is finished.

Taking the Library Online and Offline

Figure 4-34. Library State screen

Use Manage Library—>Library State to take the library online or offline. Check
the current library status, and click the button displayed to change the library
status.

4-20 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 It is sometimes necessary to take the library offline before performing some
servicing functions for the library. Once these operations have finished, it is
necessary to bring the library back online.

Note: The tape drive is always online, even when the library is offline.

Conducting a Library Inventory

Figure 4-35. Inventory screen

Use Manage Library—>Inventory to force the library to execute an inventory of

the cartridge magazine, accessor, and tape drive to refresh the library map.
Conduct an inventory by clicking on the Start button. The Inventory Progress bar
indicates the process in action. Wait until the operation finishes before resuming
normal library operations.
a29z0138

Figure 4-36. Inventory progress bar

| An inventory is conducted automatically when the power is first turned ON or

| when a cartridge magazine is inserted.

Configuring the Library

Managing User Access
a29z0122

Figure 4-37. User Access screen

Use Configure Library—>User Access to add, modify, or remove additional

administrator, superuser, and user accounts, and to change passwords. Up to 7
users can be configured using the Web User Interface.

Add, modify, or remove users using the following information:

Chapter 4. Operations 4-21

 v Select action
– Add - To add new users.
– Modify - To change the selected user’s access role and/or password.
– Remove - To delete the selected user from the system.
v User Name - The user name of a registered user.
v Password - Case-sensitive password for the registered user.
v Role - The user access level for the registered user.
– Users are allowed to monitor the library, but not perform actions that affect
the physical library.
– Superusers are allowed to operate the physical and logical library, but not
perform actions that affect the library configuration.
– Administrator users are allowed access to the entire physical library and
logical library, including configuration. One and only one administrator user
must be assigned the login name admin.

An administrator can add/modify/remove additional administrator, superuser,

and user accounts, and change passwords. User accounts are restricted to specific
areas of the library. For more information, see “User Privileges” on page 2-8.

A User account can be modified by an administrator to provide a user with

superuser or administrator access permissions to the library functions.

Enter all user IDs and passwords on the Library Configuration form in
Appendix F, “Library Configuration Form,” on page F-1.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring Physical Library Settings

a29z0123

Figure 4-38. Physical library settings screen

Use Configure Library—>Physical to configure the I/O Station and auto cleaning.

Configure the I/O Station and auto cleaning cartridge slot assignment using the
following settings:
v Library name - Use to enter a name for your library.
v Auto cleaning - Use to enable automatic cleaning of the tape drive. Auto
cleaning can be enabled only when there the number of active slots is less than
the total number of available slots in the library.
v Bar code label length - Use to choose the number of characters in the cartridge
bar code that is reported to the host computer.

4-22 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring Logical Library Settings

a29z0124
Figure 4-39. Logical library settings screen

Use Configure Library—>Logical to configure the library access mode for the
logical library and the number of active cartridge slots.

Configure the library access mode using the following settings:

v Library mode - The library mode can be set to Random or Sequential.
– Random - In random mode, the library allows the server's (host's) application
software to select any data cartridge in any order.
– Sequential - In sequential mode, the library's firmware predefines the
selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the library
to select the first available cartridge found (counting from the lowest
Column/Tier position through the highest cartridge position in your library)
for loading into the drive. See “Location Coordinates and Element Addresses”
on page 1-9.
Loop - Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the lowest
Column/Tier cartridge position after the cartridge in the highest Column/Tier
cartridge position has been filled with data and sent back to its home
position. This allows endless backup operations without user interaction.
| Autoload - Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first available
| cartridge (the lowest Column/Tier cartridge position that contains a cartridge)
| automatically if the library powers ON, or resets, with an empty drive. If the
| library powers ON with a cartridge already in the drive, sequential mode will
| start from the home position of that cartridge, unless the host issues a rewind
| and unload command to the drive, in which case the next cartridge in
| sequence will be loaded into the drive.
| To start sequential mode if autoload is OFF, use the Move Cartridges command
| to load the first cartridge into the drive. The sequence starts from the home
| position of that cartridge. Cartridges need not be in contiguous slots.
| To stop sequential mode, use the Move Cartridges command to unload the
| drive. This cancels sequential mode; the next sequential cartridge is NOT loaded.
| To restart sequential mode, use the Move Cartridges command again to load a
| cartridge; the loading sequence will resume from the home position of that
| cartridge.
| v Number of active slots - Select the number of active slots you would like to
| assign in your library. Selecting the number of active slots defines the number of
| storage slots, number of cleaning/inactive slots, whether the I/O Station is
| enabled/disabled, and whether auto cleaning is allowed.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-23

| The first digit configures the number of active storage positions (4, 6, 8, or 9).
| The second digit configures Column 5, Tier 1 of the magazine as an I/O Station
| (0 when disabled, and 1 when enabled).
| The Auto Cleaning function can be enabled only if there is at least 1 inactive
| position in the magazine. If Auto Cleaning is enabled, the inactive positions
| become cleaning cartridge positions.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring Network Settings

a29z0125

Figure 4-40. Network settings screen

Use Configure Library—>Network to set the network settings for the library.

Note: The internet protocol (IPv4, IPv6 or dual IPv4/IPv6) selection is used for the
TS2900 Tape Autoloader IP address, subnet mask, gateway address, time
server address, mail server address, SNMP trap address, and EKM server
addresses.

Configure the network using the following settings:

v Link speed - Ethernet duplex mode (Auto, 10Base-T Full, 10Base-T Half,
100Base-TX Full, 100Base-TX Half).
v TCP/IP settings - IPv4, IPv6, and dual stack IPv4/IPv6 are supported. To enable
the dual IPv4/IPv6 protocol, select both Use IPv4 and Use IPv6 and enter
parameters for both.
v Security - Select Enable SSL for Web to provide secure communications
between the web browser and the tape library.
| v IPv4 setting - Select Use IPv4 to enable the IPv4 Internet Protocol. Select the
| corresponding radio button to obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP) or use
| static IP address settings. When using DHCP, use the Operator Panel to

4-24 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| determine the library's assigned IP address. See “Viewing Current Information”
| on page 4-3. Enter the following parameters if using static IP address settings.
| – IPv4 address - Sets the TCP/IPv4 address of the library on the network.
| – Subnet mask - Defines and limits users within a local network.
| – Gateway - Allows access outside the local network.
v IPv6 setting - Select Use IPv6 to enable the IPv6 Internet Protocol. Select the
corresponding check boxes to obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP), to
obtain an IP address using stateless auto configuration, or use static IP address
settings. Enter the following parameter if using static IP address settings.
– IPv6 address - Sets the TCP/IPv6 address of the library on the network.
– Prefix Length - Decimal value between 0 and 128 indicating the number of
contiguous, high-order bits comprising the network portion of the address.
– Gateway - Allows access outside the local network.
v DNS setting - Select Use DNS to use a domain name server. The DNS server, if
entered, allows the encryption, date and time, and notifications IP addresses to
be specified using hostnames instead of numerical IP addresses.
– DNS IP address - Sets the IP address of the DNS server.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring Encryption Settings

a29z0126

Figure 4-41. Encryption settings screen

Use Configure Library—>Encryption to configure an encryption method for data

being stored on tape cartridges. The library supports transparent library-managed
| encryption by the tape drive itself (IBM Ultrium 5 3572-S5H and Ultrium 4
| Half-High Tape Drive Model 3572-S4H only) if you have purchased the Encryption
Activation Key feature, relieving the host of the burden of managing encryption
applications and systems.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-25

 Note: Application Managed Encryption (AME) does not require a key. Library
Managed Encryption (LME) and System Managed Encryption (SME) require
a license key which is available by purchasing Feature Code 5901.

a29z0171
Figure 4-42. Encryption settings enabled screen

Configure encryption using the following settings:

| v Feature Activation Key - Optional feature of the library to activate the
| encryption functions in your library (Models S5H and S4H only).
v Security - Sets secure communications using secure sockets layer (SSL).
– Enable SSL for EKM - Select to enable secure communications between the
tape library and the EKM server.
v Primary and Secondary EKM Server Settings (library-managed encryption)
– IP address - The IP address of the primary encryption key manager. IPv4,
IPv6, and dual stack IPv4/IPv6 are supported.
– TCP port number - The TCP port number of the encryption key manager.
– SSL port number - The port number of the encryption key manager.
v Encryption method
– Application Managed - For encryption in operating environments that run an
application capable of generating and managing encryption policies and keys.
If you select application-managed encryption, no further configuration steps
are necessary.
– System Managed - For encryption in operating environments where no
application is capable of key management runs, and encryption is set up
implicitly through each instance of the IBM device driver.
– Library Managed - For transparent encryption by the TS2900 Tape
Autoloader tape drive.

Note: System managed tape encryption and library managed tape encryption
are transparent to one another. A tape encrypted using system managed
encryption may be decrypted using library managed encryption, and vice
versa, provided both have access to the same EKM keystore.

4-26 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v Encryption policy (library-managed encryption)
– Encrypt All (default) - All tape cartridges loaded into the tape drive are
encrypted.
– Internal Label - Selective Encryption - This option is used only for
Symantec's Veritas NetBackup.
– Internal Label - Encrypt All - This option is used only for Symantec's Veritas
NetBackup.
v Advanced Encryption Settings - The purpose of these advanced encryption
settings is to allow only IBM Support personnel (under the direction of the drive
development team) to provide a solution to an unforeseen problem or to support
a unique configuration. These options are not intended for use by the customer
without the guidance of IBM Support.

To determine whether a cartridge is encrypted, use Configure Library—>Library

Map and select the cartridge. The screen displays whether the cartridge is
encrypted, not encrypted, or unknown.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring Date and Time Settings

a29z0170

Figure 4-43. Date and Time settings screen

Use Configure Library—>Date and Time to configure the date and time settings
using one of three methods. The date and time can be automatically updated using
a remote NTP time server over the network. Alternatively, the date and time can
be synchronized with the clock on your host computer. And lastly, that date and
times can be set manually.

| Note: Selecting the Refresh button will refresh the date and time.

| Note: If you choose to manually set your date and time, you will need to reset the
| date and time after power cycling the library and after a library reset.

| Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is OFF
| before powering ON again.

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader communicates with an NTP server with the following
conditions:
v Client-server basis operation
v UDP (User Datagram Protocol) to access the NTP server
v Does not use authentication keys
Chapter 4. Operations 4-27
 v Library polling is every 12 hours

Configure the date and time using the following settings:

v NTP Server - Enables time and date control using a time server on the network.
– NTP server address - The IP address of the time server. IPv4 and IPv6
addresses are supported, depending on the TCP/IP settings. Hostnames can
be entered instead of numerical IP addresses if Use DNS is selected in the
Network settings.
– Time zone - The time zone relative to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
v If the time server is disabled, enter the local time and date manually.
– Date - The date using the MM/DD/YYYY format.
– Time - The time using the HH:MM:SS format.
v Auto Adjustment by PC - Select a time interval and click Start to synchronize
the library with the clock on your host computer at regular intervals. The Web
User Interface Java Applet must be running continuously to use this function.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring E-mail Notifications

a29z0127

Figure 4-44. E-mail settings screen

Use Configure Library—>Notifications—> SMTP (Mail) Settings to configure the

e-mail settings for sending event information whenever an event of a certain level
occurs.

Configure e-mail notification using the following settings:

v SMTP server address - SMTP mail server IPv4 or IPv6 address (depending on
network configuration)
v Sender address - E-mail message header information

4-28 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v Subject - E-mail message header information
v Mail to - E-mail addresses of contacts to be notified of the event
v Mail event - Event level notification threshold
– Error events
– Error and Warning events
– Error, Warning, and Information events

Click Test to send a test message to the addresses enabled in the Mail to fields.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring SNMP Trap Notifications

a29z0128

Figure 4-45. SNMP settings screen

Use Configure Library—>Notifications—>SNMP Settings to configure the trap

settings for sending event information whenever an event of a certain level occurs,
and to register users who are permitted to access the tape library using SNMP
Version 3. The traps supported by the TS2900 Tape Autoloader are listed in “Trap
Definitions (Types)” on page B-13.

Download the SNMP MIB file for this library from http://www.ibm.com/storage/
support. Install the MIB file on your SNMP server. Refer to your server application
documentation for instructions.

Configure SNMP trap notification using the following settings:

| v SNMP Enabled - The SNMP Enabled checkbox must have a checkmark to
| enable SNMP notifications.
v Community - SNMP community name (for example, “public”)
v Name - Device name (for example, “TS2900 Tape Autoloader”)

Chapter 4. Operations 4-29

 v Location - Physical location of the tape library
v Contact - Contact individual's name
v SNMPv3 engine ID - A read-only attribute identifying the SNMPv3 engine.
v Trap event - Event level notification threshold
– Error events
– Error and Warning events
– Error, Warning, and Information events
v Trap List - IP addresses of the SNMP monitoring stations to be notified when an
event takes place and the security settings.
– Validity - Enable/Disable setting.
– Trap version - v1, v2c, or v3. For v2c and v3, the Inform checkbox determines
whether an SNMP INFORM request is sent instead of a trap event.
– IP address - IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported.
– Community (v1 or v2c) - SNMP community name.
– User name (v3 only) - SNMPv3 unique user name.
– Authentication (v3 only) - Authentication algorithm, MD5 or SHA. When an
algorithm is specified, an authentication password and confirmation of the
password are required.
– Privacy (v3 only) - Privacy service encryption and decryption algorithm, DES
or AES. When an algorithm is specified, a privacy password and confirmation
of the password are required.
v SNMPv3 User List - SNMPv3 users who are permitted to access the tape library.
– Validity - Enable/Disable setting.
– User name - SNMPv3 unique user name.
– Authentication - Authentication algorithm, MD5 or SHA. When an algorithm
is specified, an authentication password and confirmation of the password are
required.
– Privacy - Privacy service encryption and decryption algorithm, DES or AES.
When an algorithm is specified, a privacy password and confirmation of the
password are required.

Click Test to send a test trap to the IP addresses enabled in the Trap to fields.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Saving and Restoring Configuration Settings

Your library configuration can be saved and restored automatically by a cookie and
manually by using the Web User Interface. It is recommended that you use the
Web User Interface method regardless of whether or not you use the cookie
method.

Important: Verify all configuration settings after restoring your library

configuration. Reset the library date and time (see “Configuring Date and Time
Settings” on page 4-27).

Saving and Restoring Configuration Automatically Using Cookies: If allowed

by your web browser preference settings, cookies are employed to automatically
save your library configuration on your host computer and automatically restore

4-30 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
your library configuration if your library network configuration uses a static IP
address. The following flowchart illustrates how VPD data is saved from and
restored to a library using cookies.

Does Auto Saved

VPD Data exist for Library
IP Address?
Yes No

VPD Data
is Saved
Does Library S/N =
Auto Saved S/N?
Yes No

VPD Data
is Saved
Write Auto
Saved VPD Data to
Library?
Yes No

Auto Saved VPD

Data is written
to Library Overwrite Auto
Saved VPD Data?
Yes No

Auto Saved Auto Saved

VPD Data is VPD Data is
overwritten not overwritten

Figure 4-46. Configuration using cookies

Saving and Restoring Configuration Manually using Web User Interface:

a29z0129

Figure 4-47. Save/Restore screen

Use Configure Library—>Save/Restore to manually save library configuration

settings to an external file or restore configuration settings from a file. This
function is useful when you have several logical configurations for different tape
storage implementations that you need to switch between on a regular basis.

Note: When saving the library configuration manually, the library must be offline
to save to files and to restore from files.

Click Save to save the current settings to a file.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-31

 Click Restore to load the settings from a file.

Servicing the Library

Running Encryption Key Path Diagnostics

a29z0142
Figure 4-48. Key path diagnostics screen

| Use Service Library—>Key Path Diagnostics to run diagnostic tests of the

| encryption key path if the drive in your Model S4H or S5H library is set up for
| library managed encryption. Key Path Diagnostics run tests for the tape drives,
| network connection, EKM path, and the EKM configuration.

| The test consists of four parts:

| v Drive Test - The library performs a drive communication test to confirm
| communication with the drive Ethernet test.
| v Ethernet Test - The library pings each EKM server IP address and records the
| result.
| v EKM Path Test - The library performs an EKM communication test for each
| EKM server IP address that passed the Ethernet Test. The library sends a LDI
| Crypto Diagnostics command to the drive. This drive command causes the drive
| to send a test message to the EKM verifying the application is up and running.
| v EKM Config Test - The library performs an EKM configuration test for each
| EKM server IP address that passed the EKM Path Test. The library sends a LDI
| Crypto Diagnostics command to the drive. This drive command causes the drive
| to establish a link and obtain a default key from the EKM. This test verifies the
| drive is correctly configured in the EKM.

Click Start to run the diagnostics tests.

4-32 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Viewing Operator Interventions

a29z0130
Figure 4-49. Operator interventions screen

Use Service Library—>Operator Interventions to display a log history summary

of information, warning, and error events that have occurred for the selected
library component units.

The summary can be filtered to display the operator intervention log for a specific
hardware component and specific event levels. The log is stored in memory on the
library control board. When the memory buffer is full, new events overwrite the
oldest events. The log is not cleared from memory when power is turned OFF.

Click Refresh to read the log of operator interventions from the tape library. You
can select an event in the Index List panel to display data specific to that event in
the Detail panel.

The information displayed for the operator intervention event comprises:

v Index number of the event
v Date the event occurred
v Time the event occurred
v Unit in the library where the event occurred
v Event level
v Description of the event

Viewing Library Logs

Chapter 4. Operations 4-33

 a29z0131
Figure 4-50. View Library Logs screen

Use Service Library—>View Library Logs to display a log history summary of

errors that have occurred.

The error log is displayed with sense data information. The summary can be
filtered to display errors with specific sense data code types.

Click Refresh to read the log of errors from the tape library. You can select an error
in the Index List panel to display data specific to that error in the Detail panel.

The information displayed for the error comprises:

v Index number of the error
v Date and time the error occurred
v Error code
v Description of the error

There are two types of error data displayed in the library log with different Code
attributes:
v Library/Drive sense data (Sense key/ASC/ASCQ)
For example, a 5/3B/0D error states that an illegal request was initiated that
resulted in a “medium destination element full” error being reported by the
library. Selecting log entry 012 provides detailed sense data for this failure.
Information on sense data is listed in Appendix D, “Sense Data,” on page D-1.
v Library/Drive error code ([Code])
For example, in log entry 010, a [0222] error states that the library cannot eject
medium because drive is in state of Prevent Media Removal. Information on
errors and action to resolve the problem are listed in Appendix B, “Error Codes,”
on page B-1.

4-34 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Viewing Trace Data

a29z0136
Figure 4-51. Traces screen

Use Service Library—>Traces to display a trace history of errors that have

occurred. The summary can be filtered to display the type of errors occurring
within a given time period.

The system trace data for the interval entered in the Number of Minutes field is
displayed. The summary can be filtered to trace data for specific system logs.

Click Refresh to read the system trace data from the tape library.

The information displayed in the system trace data comprises:

v Index number
v Date and time of event
v Sense data

Downloading Drive Logs

a29z0137

Figure 4-52. Download Drive Logs screen

| Use Service Library—>Download Drive Logs to download a tape drive dump to

| file for use by support personnel to help troubleshoot a problem. To create a drive
| dump, you must create both normal dump data (currently stored in flash) and
| force dump data (currently stored in memory and moved to flash).

| Note: Both filename fields must be entered and the filenames must be unique.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-35

 To download a drive log:
1. Take the library offline.
2. For each type of dump (normal or forced), click the corresponding Browse
button to display a dialog to enter a file name and to select a location to save
the drive log.
3. Click Download to download the drive log and save to a file.

Downloading Library Logs

a29z0169
Figure 4-53. Download Library Logs screen

Use Service Library—>Download Library Logs to download a tape library dump

to file for use by support personnel to help troubleshoot a problem.

To download a library log:

1. Take the library offline.
2. Click Browse to display a dialog to enter a file name and to select a location to
save the library log.
3. Click Download to download the library log and save to a file.

Resetting the Library and Drives

a29z0121

Figure 4-54. Reset library and drive screen

Use Service Library—>Reset Library/Drive to reset the library or the tape drive.

Select the target device and click Reset. The library and tape drive status is
displayed. A dialog message is displayed when the unit has been reset. The reset
operation is only fully completed when the tape library is subsequently taken
online.

Updating Library and Drive Firmware

4-36 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a29z0132
Figure 4-55. Firmware Update screen

Use Service Library—>Firmware Update to update the library and drive firmware.

Note: It is the customer's responsibility to maintain the library and drive firmware
at the most recent level.

| To determine the latest supported firmware level:

| 1. Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral.
| 2. Select Storage Systems from the Product Group menu.
| 3. Select Tape Systems from the Product Family menu.
| 4. Select the appropriate link from the Product Type menu. For example, select
| Tape autoloaders and libraries from the Product Type menu, then TS2900
| Autoloader from the Product menu to find links to updates.

| To determine the correct version of drive firmware in an S4H library:

| 1. Use Monitor System → Library Map to display the graphical view of the
| library.
| 2. Select the Drive component in the library map to display Drive Information on
| the right side of the page.
| 3. Refer to the Product ID to determine which drive is installed in the library.
| v Product ID: ULT3580-HH4
| v Product ID: ULT3580-HH4 V2
| 4. Ensure you download and install the correct drive firmware.
| v Firmware for the ULT3580-HH4 drive is not compatible with the
| ULT3580-HH4 V2 drive.
| v Firmware for the ULT3580-HH4 V2 drive is not compatible with the
| ULT3580-HH4 drive.

To update library and drive firmware:

1. Unload the tape drive, if there is a cartridge in the tape drive, before updating
library and drive firmware.
2. Use Service Library→Firmware Update and click Browse to locate the library
firmware file with extension ".fmg" (for example, TS2900_0002.0000.fmg) or the
LTO SAS drive firmware file with extension".ro" (for example, 85F0L3AH.ro)
that you downloaded from the IBM web site, then click Update. The Web User

Chapter 4. Operations 4-37

 Interface will indicate that the operation has completed. This means that the
firmware file has been successfully moved from the host computer to the
library.
3. Wait for the library to reboot before resuming normal library operations. It can
take several minutes before the library reboots.
| 4. Verify the firmware update by viewing the System Summary on the Web User
| Interface.

Important: After the update process starts, you must wait until the library reboots.
Do not attempt to interrupt the process in any way, or the upgrade will not be
successful.

Note: The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) is a tool provided by IBM
that offers multiple functional capabilities, including updating drive and
library firmware. It is available for most major platforms and requires no
special device drivers. In addition to the executable file, a README file is
provided that describes the features and capabilities of the ITDT tool, and
gives detailed information on how to use the tool. See “Using the IBM
TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)” on page 7-1.

Viewing Accessor Statistics

a29z0135

Figure 4-56. Usage Statistics screen

Use Service Library—>Usage Statistics to view statistics information about the

movement of the robotics of the library. The information presented is the
following:
v Motion counts - Lists the accumulated operation count for all movements,
accessor movements, picker movements, and X-axis movements.
v Retry counts - Lists the accumulated number of retries (re-attempts to load
cartridges) in the drive and the cartridges positions by the accessor.
v Error counts - Lists the accumulated number of errors for the accessor, X-axis
movements, and drive load and unload operations.

4-38 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Click Refresh to read the accessor statistics from the library. The Last refresh
shows the time of the most recent library data refresh.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-39

4-40 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Chapter 5. Media
“Data Cartridges” on page 5-2
“Write Once, Read Many (WORM)” on page 5-3
“Cleaning Cartridge” on page 5-4
“Cartridge Memory Chip (LTO-CM)” on page 5-5
“Bar Code Labels” on page 5-5
“Write-Protect Switch” on page 5-7
“Cartridge Care and Handling” on page 5-8
“Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin” on page 5-11
“Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges” on page 5-18
“Disposing of Tape Cartridges” on page 5-18
“Ordering Media Supplies” on page 5-19

To ensure that your IBM Ultrium Tape Drive conforms to IBM's specifications for
reliability, use only IBM LTO Ultrium tape cartridges. You may use other
LTO-certified data cartridges, but they may not meet the standards of reliability
| that are established by IBM. Neither the IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge
| (Ultrium 3), the IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 4), nor the IBM
| LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge (Ultrium 5) can be interchanged with the
| media used in other IBM non-LTO Ultrium tape products.

Figure 5-1 shows the IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge and its
components.

Figure 5-1. IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Cartridge

1 LTO cartridge memory 4 Write-protect switch

2 Cartridge door 5 Label area
3 Leader pin 6 Insertion guide

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 5-1

 Data Cartridges
The different generations of IBM Ultrium data cartridges can be identified by color.
Table 5-1. Ultrium data cartridges
Type Color
| Ultrium 5 Burgundy
| Ultrium 5 WORM Burgundy and Silvery gray
Ultrium 4 Green
Ultrium 4 WORM Green and Silvery gray
Ultrium 3 Slate Blue
Ultrium 3 WORM Slate Blue and Silvery gray
Ultrium 2 Purple
Ultrium 1 Black

All generations contain 1/2-inch, dual-coat, metal-particle tape.

You can order tape cartridges with the bar code labels included, or you can order
custom labels. To obtain tape cartridges and bar code labels, see “Ordering Media
Supplies” on page 5-19.

When processing tape in the cartridges, Ultrium Tape Drives use a linear,
serpentine recording format. The native data capacity and recording format of
Ultrium data cartridges are listed in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2. Data capacity and recording format
Type Native Data Capacity Recording Format
| Ultrium 5 1500 GB (3000 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on
compression) 1280 tracks, sixteen tracks at
a time.
Ultrium 4 800 GB (1600 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 896
compression) tracks, sixteen tracks at a
time.
Ultrium 3 400 GB (800 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 704
compression) tracks, sixteen tracks at a
time.
Ultrium 2 200 GB (400 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 512
compression) tracks, eight tracks at a time.
Ultrium 1 100 GB (200 GB at 2:1 Reads and writes data on 384
compression) tracks, eight tracks at a time.

| The first set of tracks (sixteen for Ultrium 5, 4, and 3; eight for Ultrium 2 and 1) is
written from near the beginning of the tape to near the end of the tape. The head
then repositions to the next set of tracks for the return pass. This process continues
until all tracks are written and the cartridge is full, or until all data is written.

The cartridge door 2 protects the tape from contamination when the cartridge is
out of the drive. The tape is attached to a leader pin 3 behind the door. When
the cartridge is inserted into the drive, a threading mechanism pulls the pin (and

5-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 tape) out of the cartridge, across the drive head, and onto a non-removable take-up
reel. The head can then read or write data from or to the tape.

The write-protect switch 4 prevents data from being written to the tape
cartridge. For more information, see “Write-Protect Switch” on page 5-7.

The label area 5 provides a location to place a label. For more information, see
“Bar Code Labels” on page 5-5.

The insertion guide 6 is a large, notched area that prevents the cartridge from
being inserted incorrectly.

| Generation 5, 4, and 3 of the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge have a nominal cartridge
life of 20,000 (20k) load and unload cycles. Generation 2 has a nominal cartridge
life of 10,000 (10k) load and unload cycles. Generation 1 of the LTO Ultrium Data
Cartridge has a nominal cartridge life of 5000 (5k) load and unload cycles.

Cartridge Compatibility
| Table 5-3. Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive
| IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges
|| IBM Ultrium Tape 1500 GB
|| Drive 800 GB 400 GB 200GB 100GB
| (Ultrium
| (Ultrium 4) (Ultrium 3) (Ultrium 2) (Ultrium 1)
| 5)
| Read/ Read/
| Ultrium 5 Read only
| Write Write
| Read/
| Ultrium 4 Read/Write Read only
| Write
| Ultrium 3 Read/Write Read/Write Read only
| Ultrium 2 Read/Write Read/Write
| Ultrium 1 Read/Write
|

| Note: The TS2900 Tape Autoloader supports the Ultrium 3 (3572-S3H), Ultrium 4
| (3572-S4H), and Ultrium 5 (3572-S5H) Tape Drives only.

Capacity Scaling
To control the capacity of the cartridge (for example, to obtain a faster seek time)
issue the SCSI command SET CAPACITY. For information about this command,
refer to the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference.

| Write Once, Read Many (WORM)

Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write Once, Read
| Many (WORM) method for storing data on tape. The LTO Ultrium generation 5, 4,
| and 3 drives enable WORM support when a WORM tape cartridge is loaded into
the drive.

WORM Media
Because standard read/write media are incompatible with the WORM feature, a
specially formatted WORM tape cartridge (Figure 5-2 on page 5-4) is required.
Each WORM cartridge has a unique, worldwide cartridge identifier (WWCID),
which comprises the unique CM chip serial number and the unique tape media

Chapter 5. Media 5-3

 serial number. See Table 5-1 on page 5-2for information about the color of WORM
cartridges. See “Ordering Media Supplies” on page 5-19 for information on how to
choose and purchase the appropriate WORM tape cartridges for your library.

Figure 5-2. Ultrium WORM tape cartridge

Data Security on WORM Media

Certain built-in security measures help ensure that the data written on a WORM
cartridge does not become compromised, for example:
| v The format of an Ultrium 5 1500 GB, Ultrium 4 800 GB, or Ultrium 3 400 GB
WORM Tape Cartridge is unlike that of standard read/write media. This unique
format prevents a drive that lacks WORM-capable firmware from writing on a
WORM tape cartridge.
v When the drive senses a WORM cartridge, the firmware prohibits the changing
or altering of user data already written on the tape. The firmware keeps track of
the last appendable point on the tape.

WORM Media Errors

The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur:
v Information in the servo manufacturer's word (SMW) on the tape must match
information from the cartridge memory (CM) module in the cartridge. If it does
not match, a media Error Code 7 will post on the drive's single-character display
(SCD). An error will also be displayed on the Operator Panel.
v Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not WORM capable causes
the cartridge to be treated as an unsupported medium. The drive will report a
media Error Code 7. Upgrading the drive firmware to the correct code level will
resolve the problem.

| Requirements for WORM Capability

| To use the WORM capability of your LTO Ultrium generation 5, 4, or 3 drive, you
| need to use a compatible WORM tape cartridge. See Table 5-5 on page 5-6 for
| cartridge and VOLSER compatibility and “Ordering Media Supplies” on page 5-19
| for media supplies.

Cleaning Cartridge
An IBM Ultrium Universal Cleaning Cartridge is required to clean the tape drive.
The drive itself determines when it needs to be cleaned and notifies the library.
When notified, the library indicates that the drive needs cleaning by turning ON
the “Clean Drive” LED on the front panel of the library and posting a message on
the library display.

5-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
| A tape drive within a library requires the use of a library menu function to either
| automatically or manually clean the tape drive. See Chapter 4, “Operations,” on
| page 4-1.

Important: It is recommended that the drive be cleaned only when it is requested

by the drive.

The IBM Ultrium Universal Cleaning Cartridge is valid for 50 uses. The cartridge's
LTO-CM (Cartridge Memory) chip tracks the number of times that the cartridge is
used.

Note: The drive will automatically eject an expired cleaning cartridge.

Cartridge Memory Chip (LTO-CM)

All generations of the IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges include a Linear
Tape-Open Cartridge Memory (LTO-CM) chip (1 in Figure 5-1 on page 5-1), that
contains information about the cartridge and the tape (such as the name of the
manufacturer that created the tape), as well as statistical information about the
cartridge's use. The LTO-CM enhances the efficiency of the cartridge. For example,
the LTO-CM stores the end-of-data location which, when the next time this
cartridge is inserted and the Write command is issued, enables the drive to quickly
locate the recording area and begin recording. The LTO-CM also aids in
determining the reliability of the cartridge by storing data about its age, how many
times it has been loaded, and how many errors it has accumulated. Whenever a
tape cartridge is unloaded, the tape drive writes any pertinent information to the
cartridge memory.

| The storage capacity of the LTO Generation 5 and 4 LTO-CM is 8160 bytes. LTO
| Generations 3, 2, and 1 have an LTO-CM capacity of 4096 bytes.

Bar Code Labels

A bar code label contains:
v A volume serial number (VOLSER) that is human-readable
v A bar code that the library can read

Note: The tape drive does not require bar code labels, but you should use labels
for tape cartridge identification purposes.
Table 5-4. Bar code label requirements for the Ultrium tape drive and library
Ultrium Tape Drive/Library Bar Code Label Requirements
3572 Required
3573 Required
3576 Required
3580 Not required
3581 Required with optional Bar Code Reader
3582 Required
3583 Required
3584 Required

Chapter 5. Media 5-5

 When read by a library's bar code reader, the bar code identifies the cartridge's
VOLSER to the library. The bar code also tells the library whether the cartridge is a
data cartridge or cleaning cartridge. In addition, the bar code includes the
| two-character media-type identifier Lx, where x equals 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. L identifies
the cartridge as an LTO cartridge and the number represents the generation of
cartridge for that cartridge type. Figure 5-3 on page 5-7 shows a sample bar code
label for the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge.

Tape cartridges can be ordered with the labels included or with custom labels. To
order tape cartridges and bar code labels, see “Ordering Media Supplies” on page
5-19. The bar code for usage in the LTO tape library must meet predefined
specifications. They include, but are not limited to:
| v Six or eight (the default) uppercase alphanumeric characters, where the last two
| characters must be L5, L4, L3, L2, or L1
v Label and printing to be non-glossy
v Nominal narrow line or space width of 0.423 mm (0.017 in.)
v Wide to narrow ratio of 2.75:1
v Minimum bar length of 11.1 mm (0.44 in.)
Table 5-5. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium 3, 4, and 5 Tape Drive
Cartridges VOLSER
| Ultrium 5 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL5
| Ultrium 5 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLV
Ultrium 4 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL4
Ultrium 4 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLU
Ultrium 3 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL3
Ultrium 3 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLT
Ultrium 2 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL2
Ultrium 1 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL1
IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge CLNxxxLx
* An Ultrium 3 Tape Drive must have a minimum firmware level of 54xx for it to be
compatible with the WORM cartridge.

To determine the complete specifications of the bar code and the bar code label,
visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/lto, (select LTO Support), or contact
your IBM Sales Representative.

When attaching a bar code label to a tape cartridge, place the label only in the
recessed label area (4 in Figure 5-1 on page 5-1). A label that extends outside of
the recessed area can cause loading problems in the drive.

Note: Do not place any type of mark on the white space at either end of the bar
code. A mark in this area may prevent the library from reading the label.

5-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
|
L T O 1 2 3 L5

a69i0349
|
| Figure 5-3. Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 5 Tape Cartridge
|
| The volume serial number (LTO123), cartridge type (L5), and bar code are printed
| on the label.

Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels

Apply the following guidelines whenever using bar code labels:
v Use only IBM-approved bar code labels on cartridges to be used in an IBM tape
library.
v Do not reuse a label or reapply a used label over an existing label.
v Before you apply a new label, remove the old label by slowly pulling it at a
right angle to the cartridge case.
v Use peel-clean labels that do not leave a residue after being removed. If there is
glue residue on the cartridge, remove it by gently rubbing it with your finger.
Do not use a sharp object, water, or a chemical to clean the label area.
v Examine the label before applying it to the cartridge. Do not use the label if it
has voids or smears in the printed characters or bar code (a library's inventory
operation will take much longer if the bar code label is not readable).
v Remove the label from the label sheet carefully. Do not stretch the label or cause
the edges to curl.
v Position the label within the recessed label area (5 in Figure 5-1 on page 5-1).
v With light finger pressure, smooth the label so that no wrinkles or bubbles exist
on its surface.
v Verify that the label is smooth and parallel, and has no roll-up or roll-over. The
label must be flat to within 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) over the length of the label and
have no folds, missing pieces, or smudges.
v Do not place other machine-readable labels on other surfaces of the cartridge.
They may interfere with the ability of the drive to load the cartridge.

Write-Protect Switch
The position of the write-protect switch on the tape cartridge (1 in Figure 5-4 on
page 5-8) determines whether you can write to the tape. If the switch is set to:
v The locked position (solid red), data cannot be written to the tape.
v The unlocked position (black void), data can be written to the tape.

If possible, use your server's application software to write-protect your cartridges

(rather than manually setting the write-protect switch). This allows the software to
identify a cartridge that no longer contains current data and is eligible to become a

Chapter 5. Media 5-7

 scratch (blank) data cartridge. Do not write-protect scratch (blank) cartridges; the
tape drive will not be able to write new data to them.

If you must manually set the write-protect switch, slide it left or right to the
desired position.

a67e0026
1

Figure 5-4. Setting the write-protect switch

Cartridge Care and Handling

Note: Do not insert a damaged tape cartridge into the drive. A damaged cartridge
can interfere with the reliability of a drive and may void the warranties of
the drive and the cartridge. Before inserting a tape cartridge, inspect the
cartridge case, cartridge door, and write-protect switch for breaks.

Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage cartridges or their

magnetic tape. To avoid damage to your tape cartridges and to ensure the
continued high reliability of your IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drives, use the following
guidelines:

Provide Training
v Post procedures that describe proper media handling in places where people
gather.
v Ensure that anyone who handles tape has been properly trained in handling and
shipping procedures. This includes operators, users, programmers, archival
services, and shipping personnel.
v Ensure that any service or contract personnel who perform archiving are
properly trained in media-handling procedures.
v Include media-handling procedures as part of any services contract.
v Define and make personnel aware of data recovery procedures.

Ensure Proper Packaging

v When shipping a cartridge, use the original or better packaging.
v Always ship or store a cartridge in a jewel case.
v Use only a recommended shipping container that securely holds the cartridge in
its jewel case during transportation. Ultrium Turtlecases (by Perm-A-Store) have
been tested and found to be satisfactory (see Figure 5-5 on page 5-9). They are

5-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 available at www.turtlecase.com.

a69i0077
Figure 5-5. Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase

v Never ship a cartridge in a commercial shipping envelope. Always place it in a

box or package.
v If you ship the cartridge in a cardboard box or a box of a sturdy material, ensure
the following:
– Place the cartridge in polyethylene plastic wrap or bags to protect it from
dust, moisture, and other contaminants.
– Pack the cartridge snugly; do not allow it to move around.
– Double-box the cartridge (place it inside a box, then place that box inside the
shipping box) and add padding between the two boxes (see Figure 5-6).

Figure 5-6. Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping

Chapter 5. Media 5-9

 Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions
v Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24
hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive (the time will
vary, depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was
exposed).
v Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it.
v Do not expose the cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight.
v Do not expose recorded or blank cartridges to stray magnetic fields of greater
than 100 oersteds (for example, terminals, motors, video equipment, X-ray
equipment, or fields that exist near high-current cables or power supplies). Such
exposure can cause the loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge
unusable.
v Maintain the conditions that are described in “Environmental and Shipping
Specifications for Tape Cartridges” on page 5-18.

Perform a Thorough Inspection

After purchasing a cartridge and before using it, perform the following steps:
v Inspect the cartridge's packaging to determine potential rough handling.
v When inspecting a cartridge, open only the cartridge door. Do not open any
other part of the cartridge case. The upper and lower parts of the case are held
together with screws; separating them destroys the usefulness of the cartridge.
v Inspect the cartridge for damage before using or storing it.
v Inspect the rear of the cartridge (the part that loads first into the tape load
compartment) and ensure that there are no gaps in the seam of the cartridge
case (1 in Figure 5-7 and 4 in Figure 5-9 on page 5-13). If there are gaps in
the seam (see Figure 5-7), the leader pin may be dislodged. Go to “Repositioning
or Reattaching a Leader Pin” on page 5-11.

Figure 5-7. Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge

v Check that the leader pin is properly seated (see 2 in Figure 5-8 on page 5-12).

5-10 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 v If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears usable,
copy any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery.
Discard the mishandled cartridge.
v Review handling and shipping procedures.

Handle the Cartridge Carefully

v Do not drop the cartridge. If the cartridge drops, slide the cartridge door back
and ensure that the leader pin is properly seated in the pin-retaining spring clips
(see 2 in Figure 5-8 on page 5-12). If the leader pin has become dislodged, go
to “Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin.”
v Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge. Handling the tape can damage
the tape's surface or edges, which may interfere with read or write reliability.
Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge can damage the tape and the brake
mechanism in the cartridge.
v Do not stack more than six cartridges.
v Do not degauss a cartridge that you intend to reuse. Degaussing makes the tape
unusable.

Examples of Cartridge Problems

Example: Split Cartridge Case (see Figure 5-7 on page 5-10)

The cartridge's case is damaged. There is a high possibility of media damage and
potential loss. Perform the following steps:
1. Look for cartridge mishandling.
2. Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to correctly
seat the pin (see “Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin”). Then,
immediately use data recovery procedures to minimize chances of data loss.
3. Review media-handling procedures.

Example: Improper Placement of Leader Pin (see Figure 5-8 on page 5-12)

The leader pin is misaligned. Perform the following steps:

1. Look for cartridge damage.
2. Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to correctly
seat the pin (see “Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin”). Then,
immediately use data recovery procedures to minimize chances of data loss.

Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin

Note: Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to another
cartridge. Continued use of a repaired cartridge may void the warranties of
the drive and the cartridge.

If the leader pin in your cartridge becomes dislodged from its pin-retaining spring
clips or detaches from the tape, you must use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment
Kit (part number 08L9129) to reposition or reattach it. (Do not reattach the pin if
you must remove more than seven meters (23 feet) of leader tape.) The sections
that follow describe each procedure.

Note: Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to another
cartridge. Continued use of a repaired cartridge may void the warranties of
the drive and the cartridge.

Chapter 5. Media 5-11

 Repositioning a Leader Pin
A leader pin that is improperly seated inside a cartridge can interfere with the
operation of the drive. Figure 5-8 shows a leader pin in the incorrect 1 and
correct 2 positions.

To place the leader pin in its proper position, you will need the following tools:
v Plastic or blunt-end tweezers
v Cartridge manual rewind tool (from Leader Pin Reattachment Kit, part number
08L9129)

Figure 5-8. Leader pin in the incorrect and correct positions

The cartridge door is open and the leader pin is visible inside the cartridge.

To reposition the leader pin:

1. Slide open the cartridge door (1 in Figure 5-9 on page 5-13) and locate the
leader pin 2 (you may need to shake the cartridge gently to roll the pin
toward the door).
2. With plastic or blunt-end tweezers, grasp the leader pin and position it in the
pin-retaining spring clips 3.
3. Press the leader pin gently into the clips until it snaps into place and is firmly
seated.
4. Close the cartridge door.

5-12 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Figure 5-9. Placing the dislodged leader pin into the correct position

The cartridge door is open to show the leader pin.

5. To rewind the tape, insert the cartridge manual rewind tool (1 in Figure 5-10)
into the cartridge's hub 2 and turn it clockwise until the tape becomes taut.

Figure 5-10. Rewinding the tape into the cartridge

6. Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge.

7. If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears usable,
copy any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery.
Discard the mishandled cartridge.

Reattaching a Leader Pin

The first meter of tape in a cartridge is leader tape. Once the leader tape has been
removed there is a possibility of tape breakage. After reattaching the leader pin,
transfer data from the defective tape cartridge. Do not reuse the defective tape
cartridge.

The Leader Pin Reattachment Kit contains three parts:

v Leader pin attach tool (1 in Figure 5-11 on page 5-14). A plastic brace that
holds the cartridge door open.

Chapter 5. Media 5-13

 v Cartridge manual rewind tool (2 in Figure 5-11). A device that fits into the
cartridge's hub and lets you wind the tape into and out of the cartridge.
v Pin supplies (3 in Figure 5-11). Leader pins and C-clips.
Notes:
1. Use only the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit to reattach the leader pin to the
tape. Other methods of reattaching the pin will damage the tape, the drive, or
both.
2. Use this procedure on your tape cartridge only when the leader pin detaches
from the magnetic tape and you must copy the cartridge's data onto another
cartridge. Destroy the damaged cartridge after you copy the data. This
procedure may affect the performance of the leader pin during threading and
unloading operations.
3. Touch only the end of the tape. Touching the tape in an area other than the end
can damage the tape's surface or edges, which may interfere with read or write
reliability.

3
a67e0042

Figure 5-11. Leader Pin Reattachment Kit

To reattach a leader pin by using the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit:
1. Attach the leader pin attach tool (1 in Figure 5-12 on page 5-15) to the
cartridge 2 so that the tool's hook 3 latches into the cartridge's door 4.
Pull the tool back to hold the door open, then slide the tool onto the cartridge.
Open the tool's pivot arm 5.

5-14 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a67e0033

Figure 5-12. Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the cartridge

To hold the cartridge door open, hook the tool into the door and pull the tool
back.
2. To find the end of the tape inside the cartridge, attach the cartridge manual
rewind tool (1 in Figure 5-13 on page 5-16) to the cartridge's hub 2 by
fitting the tool's teeth between the teeth of the hub. Turn the tool clockwise
until you see the end of the tape inside the cartridge. Then, slowly turn the
rewind tool counterclockwise to bring the tape edge toward the cartridge door
3.
3. Continue to turn the rewind tool counterclockwise until approximately 13 cm
(5 in.) of tape hangs from the cartridge door. If necessary, grasp the tape and
pull gently to unwind it from the cartridge.
4. Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge. Set the tool
and the cartridge aside.

Chapter 5. Media 5-15

 a67e0035
Figure 5-13. Winding the tape out of the cartridge

Turn the cartridge manual rewind tool clockwise to see the end of the tape,
then turn it counterclockwise to bring the tape to the cartridge door.
5. On the leader pin (1 in Figure 5-14), locate the open side of the C-clip 2.
The C-clip is a small black part that secures the tape 3 to the pin.
6. Remove the C-clip from the leader pin by using your fingers to push the clip
away from the pin. Set the pin aside and discard the clip.

3
1
a67e0036

Figure 5-14. Removing the C-clip from the leader pin

Use your fingers to push the C-clip from the leader pin.
7. Position the tape in the alignment groove of the leader pin attach tool (1 in
Figure 5-15 on page 5-17).
8. Place a new C-clip into the retention groove (2 in Figure 5-15 on page 5-17)
on the leader pin attachment tool and make sure that the clip's open side faces
up.
9. Place the leader pin (from step 6) into the cavity (3 in Figure 5-15 on page
5-17) of the leader pin attach tool.

Note: To prevent the leader pin from rolling into the cartridge, in the
following step use care when folding the tape over the pin.
10. Fold the tape over the leader pin and hold it with your fingers (see
Figure 5-15 on page 5-17).

5-16 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Note: Use care to ensure that the tape is centered over the leader pin. Failure
to properly center the tape on the pin will cause the repaired cartridge
to fail. When the tape is properly centered, a 0.25-mm (0.01-in.) gap
exists on both sides of the pin.

1
4

a67e0037

Figure 5-15. Attaching the leader pin to the tape

11. Close the pivot arm 4 of the leader pin attach tool by swinging it over the
leader pin so that the C-clip snaps onto the pin and the tape.
12. Swing the pivot arm open and trim the excess tape 5 so that it is flush with
the reattached leader pin 6.
13. Use your fingers to remove the leader pin from the cavity 3 in the leader
pin attach tool.
14. Use the cartridge manual rewind tool to wind the tape back into the cartridge
(wind the tape clockwise). Ensure that the leader pin is latched by the
pin-retaining spring clips on each end of the leader pin.
15. Remove the rewind tool.
16. Remove the leader pin attach tool by lifting its end up and away from the
cartridge.

Chapter 5. Media 5-17

Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges
Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24
hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive (the time will
vary, depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was
exposed).

The best storage container for the cartridges (until they are opened) is the original
shipping container. The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the
cartridges and partially protects them from humidity changes.

When you ship a cartridge, place it in its jewel case or in a sealed, moisture-proof
bag to protect it from moisture, contaminants, and physical damage. Ship the
cartridge in a shipping container that has enough packing material to cushion the
cartridge and prevent it from moving within the container.

Table 5-6 gives the environment for operating, storing, and shipping LTO Ultrium
Tape Cartridges.
Table 5-6. Environment for operating, storing, and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge
Environmental Specifications
Environmental
Factor Operational Archival Storage
Operating Shipping
Storage (*1) (*2)
10 to 45°C 16 to 32°C 16 to 25°C -23 to 49°C
Temperature
(50 to 113°F) (61 to 90°F) (61 to 77°F) (-9 to 120°F)
Relative
humidity
10 to 80% 20 to 80% 20 to 50% 5 to 80%
(non-
condensing)
Maximum wet
bulb 26°C (79°F) 26°C (79°F) 26°C (79°F) 26°C (79°F)
temperature

Notes:
1. The short term or operational storage environment is for storage durations of up to six
months.
2. The long term or archival storage environment is for durations of six months up to ten
years.

Disposing of Tape Cartridges

Under the current rules of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),
regulation 40CFR261, the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge is classified as
non-hazardous waste. As such, it may be disposed of in the same way as normal
office trash. These regulations are amended from time to time, and you should
review them at the time of disposal.

If your local, state, country (non-U.S.A.), or regional regulations are more

restrictive than EPA 40CFR261, you must review them before you dispose of a
cartridge. Contact your account representative for information about the materials
that are in the cartridge.

If a tape cartridge must be disposed of in a secure manner, you can erase the data
on the cartridge by using a high-energy ac degausser (use a minimum of 4000

5-18 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 oersted peak field over the entire space that the cartridge occupies). The tape
should make two passes through the field at 90 degree orientation change for each
pass to achieve complete erasure. Some commercial degaussers have two magnetic
field regions offset 90 degrees from each other to accomplish complete erasure in
one pass for higher throughput. Degaussing makes the cartridge unusable.

If you burn the cartridge and tape, ensure that the incineration complies with all
applicable regulations.

Ordering Media Supplies

Table 5-7 lists the cartridges and media supplies that you can order for the drive.
Table 5-7. Media supplies
Supply Item Methods of Ordering
| 20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
| Cartridge (with attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 014. Specify the VOLSER
characters that you want.

Order as part number 46X1951 (color label)

or 46X1953 (black and white label) through
an IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
| 20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
| Cartridge (without attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 015.

Order as part number 46X1960 through an

IBM-authorized distributor.
| 5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 1500 GB Data Order as part number 46C2084 through an
| Cartridge IBM-authorized distributor.
| 20-PACK IBM Ultrium 5 1500 GB WORM Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
| Tape Cartridge (with attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 034.

Order as part number 46X1963 (color label)

or 46X1965 (black and white label) through
an IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
| 20-PACK IBM Ultrium 5 1500 GB WORM Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
| Tape Cartridge (without attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 035.

Order as part number 46X1972 through an

IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.

Chapter 5. Media 5-19

 Table 5-7. Media supplies (continued)
Supply Item Methods of Ordering
20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Cartridge (with attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 010. Specify the VOLSER
characters that you want.

Order as part number 95P4443 (color label)

or 95P4445 (black and white label) through
an IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Cartridge (without attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 011.

Order as part number 95P4447 through an

IBM-authorized distributor.
5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Order as part number 95P4278 through an
Cartridge IBM-authorized distributor.
20-PACK IBM Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Tape Cartridge (with attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 032.

Order as part number 95P4457 (color label)

or 95P4459 (black and white label) through
an IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
20-PACK IBM Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Tape Cartridge (without attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 033.

Order as part number 95P4461 through an

IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Representative or any authorized IBM
Bar code labels are pre-applied to cartridges. Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 008. Specify the VOLSER
characters that you want.

Order as part number 96Pxxxx (color label)

or 96Pxxxx (black and white label) through
an IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Representative or any authorized IBM
Order VOLSER labels separately. Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 009.

Order as part number 24Rxxxx through an

IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.

5-20 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 5-7. Media supplies (continued)
Supply Item Methods of Ordering
5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Order as part number 95P2020 through an
Cartridge IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
IBM Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Order by Machine Type/Model and Feature
Cartridge (with attached labels) Code through an IBM-authorized distributor.

IBM TotalStorage 3589 Model 028/Feature

Code 2820 is a 20-pack of WORM cartridges
labeled with starting volume serial
information and, optionally, packed in
individual jewel cases. Attached labels have
been preprinted with a Bar Code that ends
with LT, where L stands for LTO, and T
identifies the cartridge as a WORM
cartridge. This media can be used with LTO
3 drives (read/write).
IBM Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Order by Machine Type/Model and Feature
Cartridge (without attached labels) Code through an IBM-authorized distributor.

IBM TotalStorage 3589 Model 029/Feature

Code 2920 is a 20-pack of WORM cartridges
packed in individual jewel cases with
unattached blank labels. This media can be
used with LTO 3 drives (read/write).
IBM LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Representative or any authorized IBM
Bar code labels are pre-applied to cartridges. Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 006. Specify VOLSER characters
you want.
IBM LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Representative or any authorized IBM
Order VOLSER labels separately (see Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
“Ordering Bar Code Labels” on page 5-22). 3589 Model 007.
IBM LTO Ultrium 100 GB Data Cartridge Order as part number 08L9120 through an
IBM-authorized distributor.
Order VOLSER labels separately (see
“Ordering Bar Code Labels” on page 5-22).
IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge Order as part number 35L2086 through an
IBM-authorized distributor.
(Universal cleaning cartridge for use with
Ultrium 1, Ultrium 2, and Ultrium 3 drives)

VOLSER labels are included.

Leader Pin Reattachment Kit Order as part number 08L9129 through an
IBM-authorized distributor.
Manual Rewind Tool Order as part number 08L9130 through an
IBM-authorized distributor.

To find the closest IBM-authorized distributor, visit the web at

http://www.ibm.com/storage/media or call 1-888-IBM-MEDIA.

Chapter 5. Media 5-21

 Ordering Bar Code Labels
The LTO Ultrium Tape Drives do not require cartridge bar code labels. However, if
you use your data cartridges or cleaning cartridges in an IBM tape library product,
you may need cartridge bar code labels if your tape library product requires them.
You can order these labels separately from the IBM Data Cartridges and Cleaning
Cartridges.

You can order bar code labels directly from the authorized label suppliers in
Table 5-8.
Table 5-8. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels
In America In Europe and Asia

EDP/Tri-Optic EDP Europe, Ltd.

6800 West 117th Avenue 43 Redhills Road
Broomfield, CO 80020 South Woodham Ferrers
U. S. A. Chelmsford, Essex CM3 5UL
Telephone: 888-438-8362 U. K.
http://www.tri-optic.com/ Telephone: 44 (0) 1245-322380
http://www.tri-optic.com/

Dataware Digital Tape Solutions

P.O. Box 740947 12 Ashley St.
Houston, TX 77274 Chatswood, NSW 2067
U. S. A. Australia
Telephone: 800-426-4844 Telephone: (02) 9496-1111
http://www.datawarelabels.com/ http://www.datawarelabels.com/

Netc, L.L.C. Netc Europe Ltd

P. O. Box 320784 The Old Surgery
Fairfield, CT 06432 5a The Pavement
U. S. A. North Curry, Taunton
Telephone: 203-372-6382 Somerset TA3 6LX
http://www.netclabels.com/ U. K.
Telephone: 44 (0) 1823 49 1439
http://www.netclabels.co.uk/

Netc Asia Pacific Pty Ltd

P.O. Box 609 Windsor, NSW 2756
Australia
Telephone: 61 (0) 2 4577 3793
http://www.netclabels.com.au/

5-22 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 6. Troubleshooting
“How the Library Reports Problems”
“Library Error Message Content” on page 6-2
“Diagnosing a Problem” on page 6-3
“Isolating Problems” on page 6-7
“Installation and Configuration Problems” on page 6-9
“Interpreting Front Panel LEDs” on page 6-10
“Reseating Cables” on page 6-11
“E-mailing Logs” on page 6-11

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader is a customer replaceable unit (CRU). The customer is
responsible for the setup and maintenance of the library. Warranty replacement of
the TS2900 Tape Autoloader, if required, is provided by exchanging the old unit
with a new unit. The customer will be charged for on-site service if a service
contract is not in place.

When an error occurs during operation of the library, the library stops the current
operation and displays an error code on the Operator Panel. Unless otherwise
noted, try to resolve the problem by cycling power to the library and retrying the
last operation.

Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is switched
OFF before powering ON again.

Before placing a service call or informing IBM Technical Support, observe the LEDs
on the front panel and error messages on the Operator Panel to determine exactly
which part is failing. See “Interpreting Front Panel LEDs” on page 6-10 for more
information. If the LEDs on all components are functioning properly, see
“Diagnosing a Problem” on page 6-3.

How the Library Reports Problems

The library uses advanced problem detection, reporting, and notification
technology to alert customers of problems as soon as they occur. It performs
numerous self-tests to monitor the library's temperature, voltage and currents, and
standard library operations. These tests monitor the library when the library is
powered ON, and during normal operation when the library is idle.

If the test detects a problem, the library generates a message that identifies which
component is likely causing the problem. The library's Error LED and Attention
LED may turn ON to indicate an abnormal state. If the problem is not severe, the
Attention LED turns ON and the library continues to provide full functionality to
the library. If the problem is not recoverable, the Error LED turns ON and an error
message is displayed on the Operator Panel.

When the library generates an attention event or an error event, support staff can
be notified immediately by setting up e-mail event notification and/or SNMP trap

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 6-1

 notification. The type of event that generates e-mail notification or SNMP trap
notification can be selected to limit the number of events to a specific priority
level.

Customers can frequently resolve a simple problem themselves by using the

information found in “Diagnosing a Problem” on page 6-3. If the problem is
unrecoverable, the customer must contact IBM Technical Support (see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2).

Library Error Message Content

When a library event occurs, the event is logged into Flash memory on the Library
Control Board.

The library error log can be viewed on the Operator Panel by selecting
Service—>View Error Status. The log lists all of the library error messages in the
order in which they occurred, starting with the most recent at the top.

The Web User Interface can display a log history summary of information,
warning, and error events that have occurred by selecting Service
Library—>Operator Interventions. The summary can be filtered to display the
operator intervention log for a specific hardware component and specific event
levels. The log is stored in memory on the Library Control Board. When the
memory buffer is full, new events overwrite the oldest events. The log is not
cleared from memory when power is turned OFF. The information displayed in the
Detail panel for the selected operator intervention event comprises of:
v Index number of the event
v Date the event occurred
v Time the event occurred
v Unit in the library where the event occurred
v Event level
v Description of the event

The Web User Interface can also display a log history summary of errors that have
occurred by selecting Service Library—>View Library Logs. The error log is
displayed with sense data information. The summary can be filtered to display
errors with specific sense data code types. The information displayed in the Detail
panel for the selected error comprises of:
v Index number of the error
v Date and time the error occurred
v Error code
v Description of the error

6-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Diagnosing a Problem
Problem Area If... Then...
Cartridge A cartridge is not ejecting from 1. Try unloading the drive (Operator Panel:
the drive... Commands—>Unload).
2. Power cycle the library.
3. If the cartridge does not eject from the drive, see
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
The cartridge case or tape inside Replace the tape cartridge.
the cartridge is damaged...
Your cleaning cartridge expires... Replace the cleaning cartridge.
A bar code label cannot be read 1. Export the suspect cartridge from the library.
by the bar code reader...
2. Confirm that the bar code label is not damaged or
missing. Replace the bar code label, if necessary.
3. Import the cartridge back into the library.
4. Inventory the library.
a. If no errors are reported, resume normal library
operations.
b. If an error is reported, see Appendix B, “Error
Codes,” on page B-1.
Cartridge Magazine The magazine will not unlock 1. Power cycle the library.
after issuing the Unlock
2. Try unlocking the magazine again (Operator Panel:
Magazine command from the
Unlock Magazine).
Operator Panel...
a. If the magazine does not unlock, see “Unlocking
the Cartridge Magazine Manually” on page 8-1.
b. If the magazine does unlock, resume normal
library operations.
The magazine can only be 1. Verify that you have requested the library to unlock
partially removed from the the entire magazine, not just the I/O Station (if
library... enabled) then retry the operation.
The magazine seems stuck on 2. Carefully pull the magazine out of the library. Stop if
something inside the library... you feel any resistance (as if something is blocking the
magazine inside the library).
3. If the magazine still cannot be removed from the
library, see “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on
page 7-2.

Chapter 6. Troubleshooting 6-3

Problem Area If... Then...
Communication You are experiencing difficulty 1. If you have a recent backup of your configuration,
Functions exercising some library functions proceed to the next step. If you do not, try to save one
(for example, updating firmware now (Web User Interface: Configure
or logging in to the library Library—>Save/Restore).
remotely)...
2. If using a static IP address, make note of your
library's IP address. If using DHCP, proceed to the
next step.
3. Restore factory defaults (Operator Panel:
Configuration—>Set Default).
4. If using a static IP address, disable DHCP (the default
setting) and enter the library IP address (Web User
Interface: Configure Library—>Network; Operator
Panel: Configuration—>Configure Network
Settings). If using DHCP, proceed to the next step.
5. Restore the library configuration (Web User Interface:
Configure Library—>Save/Restore).

6-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Problem Area If... Then...
Encryption Encryption error displayed when 1. Check the host application to ensure the host
the drive detects an error application is providing the correct encryption key.
associated with an encryption
a. Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers and the IBM
operation, if the problem
LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference for the Sense
occurred while the tape drive
Data returned for an encryption operation.
was writing data to, or reading
data from, tape... b. Retry the encryption operation after the host
application problems have been resolved.
2. Reset the drive.
a. Refer to the error code displayed on the Operator
Panel if the drive resets and POST fails.
b. Retry the encryption operation if the drive resets
and POST completes without errors.
| 3. Ensure the correct media is being used. Data
| encryption is supported with LTO Ultrium 5 and 4
| Data Cartridges only.
Encryption-related error is Check the host application's error logs, device driver logs,
posted... tape library error logs, and tape drive error logs for
entries that are related to encryption.
Connection problem with the If you are using library-managed encryption, perform the
Encryption Key Manager Key Path Diagnostic. If the test fails, a problem could
(EKM)... exist with the IP address, the Ethernet cable, or the EKM
server. Perform the following:
1. Check the Ethernet connection between the library
and the EKM server.
2. Check the TCP/IP configuration of the library and the
server.
3. Check that the EKM is correctly installed and
configured, and that the EKM application is properly
started (refer to your EKM documentation).
4. Ensure that the tape drive is registered in the EKM
(refer to your EKM documentation).
5. Ensure that a default key label is defined in the EKM
(refer to your EKM documentation).

If you are using application-managed encryption or

system-managed encryption, check your key proxy
server's documentation for a similar test.

| Lost Encryption Feature license 1. Visit https://www.ibm.com/storage/dsfa/.

key...
2. Enter your machine type, serial number, and
worldwide node name to display your encryption
license key.

Chapter 6. Troubleshooting 6-5

Problem Area If... Then...
Error Codes or The library issued an error code... 1. Make note of the error code.
TapeAlert Flags
2. Power cycle the library.
An error message was received a. If the error reoccurs, see Appendix B, “Error
via email notification (if Codes,” on page B-1.
enabled)... b. If the error does not reoccur, resume normal
library operations.
A TapeAlert flag was received... 1. Make note of the TapeAlert flag.
2. Power cycle the library.
a. If the TapeAlert reoccurs, see Appendix C,
“TapeAlert Flags,” on page C-1.
b. If the TapeAlert does not reoccur, resume normal
library operations.
The error code represents an See “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
unrecoverable error...
You get repeated errors... 1. Reset the library.
2. If the library is still reporting errors, power cycle the
library. If no errors are reported, resume normal
library operations.
3. If the library still fails, reset factory defaults. If no
errors are reported, resume normal library operations.
4. If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-2.
You are experiencing a problem 1. Run Library Verify to identify and resolve the
with your library and no error problem. See “Running Library Verify Diagnostics” on
code was created... page 4-13.
2. If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-2.
Firmware The Library firmware does not Failure of the login screen to appear on the Operator
complete the boot-up process and Panel in 15 minutes indicates that the boot-up process is
appears hung... not completing.
1. Power OFF the library and wait at least one minute
before powering ON to recover from the problem.
2. If a library firmware update was just performed, try
repeating the update procedure.
All firmware (library and drive) See “Updating Library and Drive Firmware” on page
is not at the latest level... 4-36.
Front Panel LEDs One or more front panel LEDs is See “Interpreting Front Panel LEDs” on page 6-10.
ON or blinking...
Host Attachment You are experiencing host See “Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems” on
Interface attachment interface problems... page 6-8.
Installation and You are experiencing trouble See “Installation and Configuration Problems” on page
Configuration installing or configuring your 6-9.
library...
ITDT The Performance Test duration Items affecting the duration of the test are:
varies... v The level of adapter device driver
v Your adapter model and type

6-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Problem Area If... Then...
Library Not There is a blank operator Failure of the login screen to appear on the Operator
Booting panel/display... Panel in 15 minutes indicates that the boot-up process is
not completing.
The Accessor does not move...
1. Power OFF the library and wait at least one minute
The display is stuck on before powering ON to recover from the problem.
initialization for extended period 2. If a library firmware update was just performed, try
of time... repeating the update procedure.
Logs You are required to download the Using the Web User Interface.
library log or drive log... v Library log: Service Library—>Download Library
Logs
v Drive log: Service Library —>Download Drive Logs
You need to acquire library or See Appendix E, “Message Retrieval at the Host,” on page
drive information at the host... E-1.
Network Time The library time is not being Using the Web User Interface.
Protocol (NTP) updated by the NTP server... 1. Disable NTP.
2. Set the time manually.
3. Enable NTP.
Power If the power supply switch is ON See “Isolating Library Power Problems.”
and the library is OFF...
Web User Interface HTML error 404 appears on See “Isolating Web User Interface Problems” on page 6-8.
computer screen when trying to
launch the Web User Interface...

Isolating Problems

Isolating Library Power Problems

1. Ensure the power cord is plugged in at the power supply and at the electrical
outlet, then turn library power ON. Feel for air flowing out of the cooling fan
grill on the rear of the library. Power is good if air is flowing from the cooling
fan grill.
2. If power appears to be missing, do the following:
a. Plug the power cord into another electrical outlet.
b. Plug another device into the outlet to test.
c. If the outlet tests OK, try another power cord.
3. If you have verified that the electrical outlet and power cord works properly,
but the power supply is still failing, replace the library (see “Replacing the
Library” on page 8-15).
4. If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library; however, air
does not flow from the power supply cooling fan grill on the rear of the library,
replace the library (see “Replacing the Library” on page 8-15).

Isolating Drive Problems

1. Ensure that the drive firmware is at the latest level (visit http://www.ibm.com/
storage/).
2. Cycle library power.
3. If the drive is experiencing permanent or temporary errors or if the Clean LED
is lit on the front panel of the library, clean the drive.

Chapter 6. Troubleshooting 6-7

 4. Run Library Verify.
a. If the test fails, replace the library.
b. If the test passes, run SAS Wrap Test.
1) If the test passes, resume normal library operations.
2) If the test fails, replace the library.
5. Using the host interface test tool, ITDT, run the Scan function (s) to verify that
the host application interface can detect the drive and the library. To further
test the interface communication path, run the Test Device function (t), if
available, after selecting the drive. This function will write/read data across the
interface as well as sending a command to the drive to run the internal
performance Read/Write test.
6. If the host tool, ITDT, cannot detect the drive or library, look for problems with
the host interface cabling, the HBA, the device driver or the backup application
software.

Isolating Web User Interface Problems

1. Verify that you entered the account name and password correctly. The account
name and password are case sensitive.
2. Verify that other library users are not entering commands from the Web User
Interface or Operator Panel at the same time you are issuing commands.
3. Ensure that library firmware is at the latest level (visit http://www.ibm.com/
storage/).
4. Ensure that the Ethernet cable is securely plugged in the rear of the library at
the Ethernet port.
5. Ensure that the correct IP, netmask, and gateway addresses are keyed into the
network parameters.
6. Ensure that the correct IP address is being used on the web browser.
7. If the Ethernet connection is a direct connection between the PC and the library,
a special “crossover” Ethernet cable is required.

Note: On newer PCs, either straight through or crossover Ethernet cables may
be used since the crossover requirement is provided internally.
8. Check the Ethernet cable carefully (or try another cable) and, if the cable is
connected to a network hub or switch, try a different port.
9. If the Web User Interface is still malfunctioning, refer to “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-2.

Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems

After successfully exercising “Isolating Drive Problems” on page 6-7, and more
specifically “Running Library Verify Diagnostics” on page 4-13 from the Operator
Panel (Service —>Library Verify), the following procedures are suggested to help
isolate the failure to properly establish connectivity to the Host Bus Adapter
(HBA).
1. If not already performed, run SAS Wrap Test from the Operator Panel. The test
will require that a proper Wrap Tool be installed at some point during the test
procedure.
a. If the wrap test fails, replace the library, and skip to 3 on page 6-9.
b. Proceed to 2 on page 6-9 if the wrap test passes.

6-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2. Use the ITDT utility to evaluate connectivity from the HBA through the cabling
to the drive. ITDT does not require separate device drivers, thus the Operating
System has the ability to scan and find all the LTO devices that are attached.
a. If ITDT cannot successfully locate the LTO drive, suspect cabling or HBA
problems, and skip to 4.
b. If ITDT successfully located the LTO drive, proceed to 3. See “Using the
IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)” on page 7-1 for a brief description
of ITDT and instructions on how to download the tool from the web.
3. If ITDT successfully locates the LTO device(s), verify that the correct
application device drivers and backup application software is properly
installed.
4. Ensure that all the required or latest available Operating System files and/or
updates (DLLs, PTFs, and so on) have been installed and applied.

Installation and Configuration Problems

Problems encountered during the installation of the library are usually caused by
improper application software configuration errors or an incorrectly configured
operating system. If the application software that you are using is not
communicating with the library after installation, check the following:
v Accessor locking screw: Ensure that the Accessor locking screw on the rear
panel of the library has been removed before powering on the library. See
“Removing the Accessor Locking Screw” on page 3-12.
v HBA LUN 0/1 support: A single ID will address both drive and library since the
drive is LUN 0 and the library is LUN 1. These models require an HBA that
supports LUN scanning which must be enabled at the HBA. See “Logical Unit
Number (LUN) Scanning” on page 1-9 and “Supported Servers, Operating
Systems, and Software” on page 1-12.
v Cable connections: Ensure that there are no bent pins on cables and that all
connections are securely fastened.
v SAS cables and interposers: Ensure that SAS cables and interposers (if any) are
properly attached. See “Connecting the Host Interface Cables” on page 3-13.
v Backup application installation: Refer to the documentation included with your
backup application software for instructions on how to verify proper installation.
v Device driver installation: Ensure that the proper device driver, if applicable, is
installed for the library.

Note: Many backup applications use their own drivers for the library and drive.
Before installing a driver, make sure it will not be in conflict with the
software. Contact your backup application vendor for this information.

Review the information in Chapter 3, “Installation and Configuration,” on page 3-1

to determine if a step was missed or misread.

If you are still experiencing difficulty installing or configuring your library, see
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

Important: Do not disassemble the library. The warranty on your library is voided
if the unit is disassembled without the approval of IBM Technical Support.

Chapter 6. Troubleshooting 6-9

Interpreting Front Panel LEDs
Light emitting diodes (LEDs) on the front panel of the library provide a visual
indication about the status of certain library components. The LEDs can sometimes
communicate that a problem exists when operator interventions cannot.

1 2 3 4

a29z0006
Figure 6-1. Front panel LEDs

1 Ready/Activity LED 3 Attention LED

2 Cleaning LED 4 Error LED

Table 6-1. Front Panel LED indicators

Library Ready/Activity
Cleaning LED Attention LED Error LED Message on Display
Condition LED
POST (Power ON Blinks 2 times per INITIALIZING...
OFF OFF OFF
Self Test) second INVENTORY...
Blinks 2 times per PLEASE INSERT
Magazine open OFF OFF OFF
second MAGAZINE
Magazine Blinks 2 times per MAGAZINE
OFF OFF OFF
unlocked second UNLOCKED
Blinks 2 times per PLEASE CLOSE I/O
I/O Station open OFF OFF OFF
second STATION
I/O Station Blinks 2 times per I/O STATION
OFF OFF OFF
unlocked second UNLOCKED
LOADER
Library firmware Blinks 2 times per
OFF OFF OFF FIRMWARE
is being updated second
UPDATING!
Drive firmware is Blinks 2 times per DRIVE FIRMWARE
OFF OFF OFF
being updated second UPDATING!
Drive dump is
Blinks 2 times per DRIVE DUMP DATA
being uploaded OFF OFF OFF
second UPLOADING!
to host computer
Blinks 2 times per
Library is offline OFF OFF OFF OFFLINE
second
Cartridge is being Blinks 1 time per
OFF OFF OFF READY
moved second
*** CHK ***
Library error
ON OFF OFF ON
occurred
CODE: [XXXX]

Drive error DRIVE FAULT

ON OFF OFF ON
occurred CODE: [X]

Cartridge error MEDIA FAULT

ON OFF ON OFF
occurred CODE: [X]

6-10 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 6-1. Front Panel LED indicators (continued)
Library Ready/Activity
Cleaning LED Attention LED Error LED Message on Display
Condition LED
Cleaning
REPLACE
cartridge has ON OFF ON OFF
CLEANING MEDIA
expired
Drive has
requested to be ON ON OFF OFF CLEAN DRIVE
cleaned
Drive is being Blinks 1 time per
ON OFF OFF CLEANING...
cleaned second
Library is online
and ready to
ON OFF OFF OFF READY
receive a
command

Reseating Cables
To reseat external library cables, perform the following steps:
1. Locate the following cables on the rear panel of the library.
a. SAS attachment for the drive
b. Ethernet cable for connection to a network
c. Power supply cable
2. Check and reseat, if necessary, all of the cables connected to your library.
3. Verify that there is no damage to any connector pins.

E-mailing Logs
Logs provide a summary of the current status, warnings, and errors in the library,
and include configuration settings and information provided in Operator
Interventions.

Download current logs of the library and drive when requested by your service
representative. To e-mail current logs:
1. Ensure that no applications are accessing the library. If a library operation is in
progress, wait until it finishes before attempting to generate the logs.
2. Download the current library log from the Web User Interface by selecting
Service Library—>Download Library Logs, click Refresh, and click
Download.
3. Download the current drive log from the Web User Interface by selecting
Service Library —>Download Drive Logs, click Refresh, and click Download.
4. When requested by IBM, attach the log to an e-mail message and send it to
IBM Technical Support for further diagnosis.

Chapter 6. Troubleshooting 6-11

6-12 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Chapter 7. Service Procedures
“Using the IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)”
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2

Using the IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)

ITDT is a tool with multifunction capability and is a quick, convenient, and
efficient method for drive firmware updates. It can also assist with drive dump
retrievals.

Below are some of the capabilities of this tool:

| v Runs quick or extended diagnostics on tape drives. If the library is online to the
| server/host where the tool resides, ITDT will communicate with the drive
| through the library to load and unload a test cartridge thereby exercising some
| library functions.
| v Retrieves firmware dumps from tape drives and libraries.
| v Performs a firmware update on tape drives or libraries. See note below
| regarding library firmware update.
| v Tests the performance of the environment by completely writing a cartridge and
| measuring performance.
| v Retrieves and displays cartridge information.
| v Verifies the encryption environment.
| v Does not require special device drivers.
| v Is available for most major platforms.
| v Scans the host interface and will find and display for selection all IBM LTO
| devices. The tool will not display non-IBM devices.

| The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) v4.1 is available as a command
| line utility and a graphical user interface (GUI) version.
| v The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) v4.1 tool is a command line
| utility. Invoke it by entering the executable from the directory where the tool is
| located. The Help feature gives a brief explanation of each function and shows
| the required syntax.
| v The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) v4.1 tool is a GUI version
| for Microsoft Windows. Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows Server
| 2003 (IX86, 32-bit) only are supported.

| Note: ITDT v4.1 or higher is required for Ultrium 5 tape drives. Before using
| ITDT, verify that your library host operating system is at the latest released
| level. This will ensure optimum read/write operations for diagnostics.

| Note: The legacy Tape Products (3580 GEN1 and GEN2, 3581, 3582, and 3583
| Products) are not supported with this version of ITDT but are still
| supported with the older version of ITDT v1.2.

| Note: If the library has a BCR (Barcode Reader) that requires 9.00 or greater
| firmware, the Update function will terminate with an error code of
| “Unexpected Data” if you attempt to downlevel the library firmware.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 7-1

 To download the ITDT tool and instructions for using the tool, visit
http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/.

Contacting IBM Technical Support

Before placing a call to IBM Technical Support, perform the following steps.

Note: Where instructions refer you to the web, visit http://www-03.ibm.com/

servers/storage/support/lto/.
1. Verify that you have exhausted all of the following troubleshooting options:
a. Perform all recommended diagnostic procedures. See Chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.
b. Verify that the library's and drive's firmware is at the most recent level. To
determine the latest release of firmware, visit the web.
c. Verify that your device drivers are at the most recent level (see your server
(host) manual for instructions).
v For the latest release of IBM device drivers, visit the web.
v For the latest release of device drivers by Independent Software Vendors
(ISVs), visit the appropriate third-party web site.
d. Verify whether your hardware and software configuration is supported. To
determine the latest supported attachments, visit the web.
e. Ensure that cables and connectors are not damaged.
f. Review all documentation carefully. (Experience has demonstrated that most
questions are answered in your documentation.)
2. Follow these steps to take full advantage of your call:
a. Be prepared to explain whether the software or hardware has worked
properly at anytime in the past. Have you changed anything recently?
b. Pinpoint the exact location of your problem, if possible. Note the steps that
led to the problem. Can you duplicate the problem or is it a one-time
occurrence?
c. Note any error messages displayed on your PC monitor or file server. Write
down the exact error message.
d. If at all possible, call while at your computer, with the library installed and
turned on.
e. If running on a network, have all relevant information available (that is,
type, version number, network hardware, and so on).
f. Having this information available when you call for customer assistance will
enable support personnel to resolve your problem in the most efficient
manner possible.
v Library machine type and model name(s)
v Serial number of the library (front of the library on the label underneath
the power button)
v Library and drive firmware levels currently installed
v Device driver information
v Host application name and version
v Type of host, operating system version, clock speed, RAM, network type,
network version, and any special boards installed
3. The IBM Support Center will assist with problem determination and initiate
shipment of a replacement part, if needed, to the customer's location. To contact
IBM Technical Support:

7-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
v In the USA: 1-800-IBM_SERV (1-800-426-7378)
v All other Countries/Regions: http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/
v To open a Service Request online: Under Support & downloads, click Open
a Service Request.

Chapter 7. Service Procedures 7-3

7-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures
“Required Tools”
“Replacing a Defective Cartridge Magazine”
“Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually”
“Moving the Library from a Rack to a Desktop” on page 8-2
“Moving the Library from a Desktop to a Rack” on page 8-8
“Replacing the Library” on page 8-15
“Applying a RID Tag to a Library” on page 8-18

Required Tools
Installing or relocating the rack mount kit or deskside kit for your library requires
the following tool:
v #2 Phillips screwdriver

Replacing a Defective Cartridge Magazine

After receiving your replacement cartridge magazine, complete the following steps
to replace the defective cartridge magazine. The library does not need to be
powered OFF for this procedure.
1. Remove the defective cartridge magazine from the library using the Operator
Panel or the manual method of removal.
v Operator Panel: Use the Unlock Magazine command. See “Unlocking the
Cartridge Magazine” on page 4-5.
v Manual method: See “Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually.”
If you are unable to remove the defective cartridge magazine from the library
using either of the above methods, see “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on
page 7-2.
2. After removing the defective magazine from the library, remove all cartridges
from the defective magazine and insert them into the replacement magazine.
3. Insert the new magazine with cartridges into the library. Wait for the library to
complete its inventory before resuming normal library operations.
4. Properly dispose of the defective magazine.

Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually

This procedure is used to remove the cartridge magazine manually when, for
example, the power is turned OFF or if the magazine fails to unlock in response to
the Unlock Magazine command from the Operator Panel.

To unlock the cartridge magazine manually:

1. On the front panel, locate the access hole for the cartridge magazine locking
release mechanism to the left of the Operator Panel (1 in Figure 8-1 on page
8-2).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 8-1

 a29z0027
1

Figure 8-1. Cartridge magazine lock release access hole

2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip, or similar object, into the lock
release access hole and gently push the lock mechanism to release the lock and
eject the cartridge magazine.
3. If the I/O Station is enabled, push the lock mechanism twice or push and hold
the lock mechanism until the cartridge has been withdrawn far enough to clear
the I/O Station lock.
4. Remove the cartridge magazine from the front of the library. If the magazine is
stuck in the library and does not eject, see “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
on page 7-2.
5. Examine the magazine and cartridges for damage.
v If there is damage to a cartridge, replace that cartridge.
v If there is damage to the magazine, replace the magazine.

Moving the Library from a Rack to a Desktop

This procedure is used to relocate a library mounted in a rack using the rack
mount kit to a desktop using the deskside kit.

Removing Library from a Rack

1. Take the library offline.

Note: If the library is processing queued requests, wait for the library to
finish the current library task.
2. From the Web User Interface, select Configure Library —> Save/Restore —>
Save to save the current library configuration to a file for easy restoration.
3. After saving your configuration, log out of the Web User Interface and close
the Internet browser.
4. From the Operator Panel, select Unlock Magazine, and press Enter to remove
the cartridge magazine (if necessary).

Note: If the cartridge magazine fails to unlock in response to the Unlock

Magazine command from the Operator Panel, you can unlock the
magazine manually. See “Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually”
on page 8-1.
5. From the Operator Panel, select Move to Ship Position, and press Enter. This
moves the Accessor assembly to a safe position ready for moving the library.

Note: If the library is to be transported any distance, this move is necessary to

park the Accessor in the position where it can be secured by the
Accessor locking screw.
6. From the Operator Panel top menu, select Logoff, and press Enter.

8-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 7. On the rear panel of the library:
a. Power OFF the library by toggling the power supply switch to the OFF
(O) position.
b. Disconnect the power cable from the library power supply.
c. Disconnect the Ethernet cable.
d. Disconnect the SAS host interface cable.
8. Insert and tighten the Accessor locking screw 1.

a29z0026
1

Figure 8-2. Insert Accessor locking screw

9. Remove the SAS cable, power cable, and Ethernet cable from the hook and
loop fastener strap 12 on the rear of the library (Figure 8-3).

12

a29z0023

Figure 8-3. Removing cables at the rear of the library

10. Remove the two round-head screws 10 on each rear bracket securing the
rear of the library to the rack (Figure 8-4 on page 8-4).

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-3

 10 10

a29z0022
Figure 8-4. Removing screws at the rear of the library

11. Remove the large black screws 11 from each front bracket securing the front
of the library to the rack, and slide the library chassis out of the rack
(Figure 8-5).

11
a29z0021

Figure 8-5. Removing screws at the front of the library

12. Remove the flat-head screws 8 to remove the left3 and right 4front
brackets from the front of the library chassis (Figure 8-6 on page 8-5).

8-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 8
3

a29z0017
8

Figure 8-6. Removing the front brackets from the library chassis

Installing the Library on a Desktop

For details on the deskside kit components, see “Installing the Deskside Cover” on
page 3-2.
1. Attach the left 5 and right 3 rails to the chassis using 3 flat-head screws
6 on each side (Figure 8-7).

a29z0009

Figure 8-7. Attaching the side rails to the library chassis

2. Turn the library over and attach the feet 1 to the designated locations on the
bottom of the library (Figure 8-8 on page 8-6). Return the library to the
upright position.

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-5

 1

a29z0013
Figure 8-8. Attaching the feet

3. Position the deskside cover 2 in the correct orientation over the library
chassis and attach the cover to the library using 3 flat-head screws6 on each
side (Figure 8-9).

a29z0011

Figure 8-9. Attaching the cover to the library chassis (side screws)

4. Attach the deskside cover using the 2 large pan-head screws 4 on the rear
of the library (Figure 8-10 on page 8-7).

8-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 4

a29z0012
Figure 8-10. Attaching the cover to the library chassis (rear screws)

5. Place the library in the desired desktop location.

Important: Do not place the library on its side. Do not stack objects on top of
the library.
6. Remove the Accessor locking screw 1.
a29z0026

Figure 8-11. Removing the Accessor locking screw

7. On the rear panel of the library:

a. Connect the SAS host interface cable.
b. Connect the Ethernet cable.
c. Connect the power cable from the library power supply. Route all cables
through the hook and loop fastener strap.
d. Power ON the library by toggling the power supply switch to the ON (|)
position.
8. Insert the cartridge magazine if previously removed.
9. Restore the library configuration. See “Saving and Restoring Configuration
Settings” on page 4-30.
10. From the Operator Panel, select Run Library Verify, and press Enter to run
library diagnostics. Follow the on-screen instructions. If an error occurs, see
Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.
11. Take the library online.

Important: Do not stack objects on top of the library.

For more detailed instructions, see Chapter 3, “Installation and Configuration,” on

page 3-1.

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-7

Moving the Library from a Desktop to a Rack
This procedure is used to relocate a library mounted on the desktop using the
deskside kit to a rack using the rack mount kit.

Removing Library from a Desktop

1. Take the library offline.

Note: If the library is processing queued requests, wait for the library to
finish the current library task.
2. From the Web User Interface, select Configure Library—>Save/
Restore—>Save to save the current library configuration to a file for easy
restoration.
3. After saving your configuration, log out of the Web User Interface and close
the Internet browser.
4. From the Operator Panel, select Unlock Magazine, and press Enter to remove
the cartridge magazine (if necessary).

Note: If the cartridge magazine fails to unlock in response to the Unlock

Magazine command from the Operator Panel, you can unlock the
magazine manually. See “Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually”
on page 8-1.
5. From the Operator Panel, select Move to Ship Position, and press Enter. This
moves the Accessor assembly to a safe position ready for moving the library.

Note: If the library is to be transported any distance, this move is necessary to

park the Accessor in the position where it can be secured by the
Accessor locking screw.
6. From the Operator Panel top menu, select Logoff, and press Enter.
7. On the rear panel of the library:
a. Power OFF the library by toggling the power supply switch to the OFF
(O) position.
b. Disconnect the power cable from the library power supply.
c. Disconnect the Ethernet cable.
d. Disconnect the SAS host interface cable.
8. Insert and tighten the Accessor locking screw 1.
a29z0026

Figure 8-12. Inserting Accessor locking screw

9. Remove the large pan-head screws 4 on the rear of the library (Figure 8-13
on page 8-9).

8-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 4

a29z0012
Figure 8-13. Removing screws from the rear of the library

10. Remove the flat-head screws 6 on each side securing the deskside cover to
the library, and remove the deskside cover 2 (Figure 8-14).

a29z0011
6

Figure 8-14. Removing the cover from the library chassis

11. Turn the library over and remove the feet 1 from the bottom of the library
(Figure 8-15 on page 8-10). Return the library to the upright position.

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-9

 1

a29z0013
Figure 8-15. Removing the feet

12. Remove the flat-head screws 6 on each side to remove the left5 and right
3 rails from the chassis (Figure 8-16).

a29z0009
6

Figure 8-16. Removing side rails from the library chassis

Installing the Library in a Rack

For details on the rack mount kit components, see “Installing in a Rack” on page
3-5.
1. Determine the location in your rack for your library and mark with a pencil.
For details on rack mount locations, see “Installing in a Rack” on page 3-5.
2. Attach the left 3 and right 4 front brackets to the front of the library
chassis using two flat-head screws 8 on each side (Figure 8-17 on page 8-11).
Use the bottom two screw holes on each side.

8-10 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
8
3

a29z0017
8

Figure 8-17. Attaching the front brackets to the library chassis

3. Attach the left 1 and right 2 rear brackets to the left5 and right 6
front rails using two round-head screws 10 on each side (Figure 8-18).

Note: Run the hook and loop fastener strap through the slot on the right rear
bracket and attach it back upon itself.

1 12
2

10

5 6 a29z0019

Figure 8-18. Attaching the rear brackets to the rails

Important: Do NOT tighten these screws completely at this time.

4. Slide in the rear rails 7 from back to front, to create the rail assemblies.
Ensure the screw holes face outwards (Figure 8-19 on page 8-12).

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-11

 7

a29z0018
Figure 8-19. Creating the rail assemblies

5. Install the rail assemblies into the rack (Figure 8-20 on page 8-13). Ensure the
three holes in the front of the unit align with the 1U space marked on the
vertical rails in 2 on page 8-10. Secure the rails to the rack using four flat-head
screws 9on each side of the rack. Use both of the two screw locations on the
rear of the rack rail. Use the top and middle screw locations on the front of
the rack rail.

8-12 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 9

a29z0020
Figure 8-20. Installing the rail assemblies

6. Slide the library chassis into the rack. Secure the front of the library to the
rack using the large black screws 11 in the bottom holes on each front
bracket (Figure 8-21).

11
a29z0021

Figure 8-21. Securing the front of the library in the rack

7. Secure the rear of the library to the rack using two round-head screws 10 on
each rear bracket (Figure 8-22 on page 8-14). Tighten the other rear bracket

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-13

 screws to secure the library to the rack.

10 10

a29z0022
Figure 8-22. Securing the rear of the library in the rack

8. Run the SAS cable, power cable, and Ethernet cable through the hook and
loop fastener strap 12, then tighten the strap (Figure 8-23).

12

a29z0023

Figure 8-23. The cables at the rear of the library

9. Remove the Accessor locking screw 1.

a29z0026

Figure 8-24. Removing Accessor locking screw

10. On the rear panel of the library:

a. Connect the SAS host interface cable.
b. Connect the Ethernet cable.
c. Connect the power cable or rack PDU line cord to the library power
supply.

8-14 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 d. Power ON the library by toggling the power supply switch to the ON (|)
position.
11. Insert the cartridge magazine if previously removed.
12. Restore the library configuration. See “Saving and Restoring Configuration
Settings” on page 4-30.
13. From the Operator Panel, select Run Library Verify, and press Enter to run
library diagnostics. Follow the on-screen instructions. If an error occurs, see
Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.
14. Take the library online.

For more detailed instructions, see Chapter 3, “Installation and Configuration,” on

page 3-1.

Replacing the Library

The entire library, including the drive, is a CRU. At CRU replacement, the serial
number of the new library must be changed to the serial number of the old library
to maintain IBM entitlement to service. If the static IP address of the new library
matches the static IP address saved in the cookie, the Web User Interface checks
the serial number of the new library against the serial number saved in the cookie.
If the new serial number is different from the saved serial number, the saved data
in the cookie can be used to change the serial number of the new library and
configure the new library. If the data inheritance fails or your network
configuration uses DHCP, the library serial number can be changed using the Web
User Interface when logged in as service.

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-15

 Does Auto Saved
VPD Data exist for Library
IP Address?
Yes No

VPD Data
is Saved
Does Library S/N =
Auto Saved S/N?
Yes No

VPD Data
is Saved
Write Auto
Saved VPD Data to
Library?
Yes No

Auto Saved VPD

Data is written
to Library Overwrite Auto
Saved VPD Data?
Yes No

Auto Saved Auto Saved

VPD Data is VPD Data is
overwritten not overwritten

Figure 8-25. Library configuration using cookies

This procedure is used to replace the entire library in the event of a serious library
malfunction.
1. If using a static IP address, make a note of your library's IP address. If using
DHCP, proceed to the next step.
2. Remove the old library chassis using the corresponding procedure in
“Removing Library from a Rack” on page 8-2 or “Removing Library from a
Desktop” on page 8-8.
3. Install the new library chassis using the corresponding procedure in “Installing
the Library on a Desktop” on page 8-5 or “Installing the Library in a Rack” on
page 8-10.
4. It is necessary to change the serial number on the new library to the serial
number of the old library to preserve your entitlement to IBM service.
v If you are using a static IP address, complete the following steps.
a. Using the Operator Panel, enter the network settings for the library. See
“Configuring Network Settings” on page 4-11. Be sure to disable DHCP.
b. Log in to the Web User Interface as admin. The following screen appears.

8-16 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a29z0060
Figure 8-26. Auto saved data confirmation

c. Answer Yes to restore the saved configuration from your old library to
your new library. Answer No to maintain the current configuration of the
new library and to display the next Confirm Dialog box.

a29z0061
Figure 8-27. Overwrite confirmation dialog box

d. Answer No to maintain both configuration files. Answer Yes to maintain

the new library configuration.
e. Verify all configuration settings. Change any settings as required. Update
the Library Configuration Form, if necessary. Save your new
configuration using the Web User Interface (Configure
Library—>Save/Restore).
f. Update your host application device table with the new drive serial
number. To determine the new drive serial number, log in to the Web User
Interface and refer to the drive information on the Library Map.
v If you are using DHCP to acquire an IP address, complete the following
steps.
a. Using the Operator Panel, retrieve your new library IP address. See
“Viewing Current Information” on page 4-3.
b. Contact IBM Technical Support for the service password.
– In the USA: 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378)
– All other countries and regions: http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/
c. Log in to the Web User Interface. Use the username service and the
password from IBM Technical Support.
d. Go to Configure Library—>Save/Restore. Enter the serial number to
match the serial number of your old library and click Restore Serial.

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-17

 a29z0094
Figure 8-28. Save/Restore screen

e. On the same screen, click Restore to restore the saved configuration from
your old library to your new library. If you do not have a saved
configuration on your host, you must reconfigure your library. See
“Configuring the Library” on page 3-15.
f. Log out of the Web User Interface.
g. Log in to the Web User Interface as admin.
h. Verify all configuration settings. Change any settings as required. Update
the Library Configuration Form, if necessary. Save your new
configuration using the Web User Interface (Configure
Library—>Save/Restore).
i. Update your host application device table with the new drive serial
number. To determine the new drive serial number, log in to the Web User
Interface and refer to the drive information on the Library Map.
5. After physically installing and reconfiguring the new library, confirm that the
library firmware installed is the latest version. Note the firmware revision
number using the System Summary window of the Web User Interface and
check against the latest firmware version at http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/
storage/support. To update the library firmware, if necessary, see “Updating
Library and Drive Firmware” on page 4-36.
6. Copy the serial number and WWN from the old library onto the new library.
This step is necessary to maintain a valid warranty. See “Applying a RID Tag to
a Library.”

Applying a RID Tag to a Library

A RID (Repair Identification) Tag maintains the original serial number record and
WWN of the machine to ensure that your warranty coverage, if applicable, is not
interrupted. The tag is important for customer inventory accuracy. Follow the
instructions on the RID tag precisely.

8-18 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
2

a29z0052

Figure 8-29. RID tag

1. Copy the machine type (MT) and serial number (SN) from the old library onto
the Repair ID tag (1 in Figure 8-29).
2. Copy the Worldwide Name (WWN) from the old library onto the WWN ID
label (2 in Figure 8-29).
3. Place the RID tag close to, but not covering, the serial number on the new
library. Repeat for the WWN ID label.

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-19

8-20 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Chapter 9. Parts List
“Features”
“Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs)”
“Power Cords and Receptacles” on page 9-2

Features
Table 9-1. Optional features
Description Feature Code HVEC Part Number
2m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable 5402 95P4711
(from HBA with SFF-8470 to
drive with SFF-8088)
5.5m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x 5406 95P4712
Cable
(from HBA with SFF-8470 to
drive with SFF-8088)
2m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x 5502 95P4713
Cable
(from HBA/Interposer with
SFF-8088 to drive with
SFF-8088)
5.5m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x 5506 95P4714
Cable
(from HBA/Interposer with
SFF-8088 to drive with
SFF-8088)
Transparent LTO Encryption 5901 45E3797
Rack Mount Kit with RML 7006 45E3785
Line Cord
Deskside Kit 7010 45E3789
Additional Cartridge 8111 45E3793
Magazine

Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs)

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader has customer replaceable units (CRUs) that must be
added, removed, and replaced by the customer. If you choose to have the CRU
added, removed, or replaced by an IBM Service Representative, there will be a
charge for the service.

| Note: There are two CRU Part Numbers for the S4H Generation 4 Tape Drive
| Library Chassis. Refer to the Serial Number on the S4H library being
| replaced. Use this Serial Number to determine which S4H CRU Part
| Number is the correct CRU.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 9-1

 Table 9-2. Customer replaceable units
Description CRU Part Number
S3H Generation 3 Tape Drive Library 45E4824
Chassis
S4H Generation 4 Tape Drive Library 45E4831
Chassis

| (This CRU is for S4H libraries with a chassis

| serial number of 13-07999 or lower.)
| S4H Generation 4 Tape Drive Library 46X8578
| Chassis

| (This CRU is for S4H libraries with a chassis

| serial number of 13-08000 or higher.)
| S5H Generation 5 Tape Drive Library 46X8519
| Chassis
| 2m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable 95P4587
| 5.5m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable 95P4588
| 2m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable 95P4488
| 5.5m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable 95P4494
Cartridge Magazine 46Y0016

Power Cords and Receptacles

Figure 9-1 on page 9-3 shows the receptacles that are used by the power cords in
Table 9-3 on page 9-3. Match the index number that is beside each plug to the
index number in the table.

9-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

a77ug005
17 18 19 20

Figure 9-1. Types of power cord receptacles

Table 9-3. Power cords

Description, Feature Code
Index Number in
(FC), and Part Number Plug Standard Reference Country or Region
(Figure 153)
(PN)
US/Canada NEMA 5-15P Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, 1
v 2.8 m, 125V Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada,
Cayman Islands, Colombia, Costa
v FC 9800
Rica, Curacao, Dominican Republic,
v AAS PN 39M5081 Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala,
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7141 Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica,
Japan, Liberia, Mexico, Netherlands
Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Philippines, Saudi Arabia, South
Korea, Suriname, Taiwan, Trinidad
Tobago, Venezuela, US
Chicago NEMA 5-15P Chicago, U.S.A. 1
v 1.8 m, 125 V
v FC 9986
v AAS PN 39M5080
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7143

Chapter 9. Parts List 9-3

Table 9-3. Power cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code
Index Number in
(FC), and Part Number Plug Standard Reference Country or Region
(Figure 153)
(PN)
US/Canada NEMA 6-15P Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, 2
v 2.8 m, 250 V Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada,
Cayman Islands, Costa Rica,
v FC 9833
Curacao, Dominican Republic,
v AAS PN 39M5095 Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala,
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7145 Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica,
Japan, Liberia, Netherlands Antilles,
Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Philippines, Suriname, Taiwan,
Thailand, Trinidad Tobago,
Venezuela, US
Australia AS 3112 Argentina, Australia, China, 3
v 2.8 m, 250V Colombia, New Zealand, Papua
NZS 198 New Guinea, Paraguay, Uruguay,
v FC 9831
Western Samoa
v AAS PN 39M5102
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7153
France, Germany CEE 7 - VII Afghanistan, Algeria, Andorra, 4
v 2.8 m, 250V Angola, Aruba, Austria, Belgium,
Benin, Brazil, Bulgaria, Burkina
v FC 9820
Faso, Burundi, Cameroon, Central
v AAS PN 39M5123 African Republic, Chad,
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7146 Congo-Brazzaville, Curacao, Czech
Republic, Democratic Republic of
Congo, Denmark, Egypt, Finland,
France, French Guiana, Germany,
Greece, Guinea, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Iran, Ivory Coast, Jordan,
Kenya, Korea, Lebanon,
Luxembourg, Macau, Malagasy,
Mali, Martinique, Mauritania,
Mauritius, Monaco, Morocco,
Mozambique, Netherlands,
Netherlands Antilles, New
Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland,
Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi
Arabia, Senegal, Spain, Sweden,
Sudan, Syria, Togo, Tunisia, Turkey,
Yugoslavia, Zaire, Zimbabwe,
Vietnam
Denmark DK2-5A Denmark 5
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9821
v AAS PN 39M5130
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7147
South Africa SABS 164 Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan, South 6
v 2.8 m, 250V Africa, Sri Lanka
v FC 9829
v AAS PN 39M5144
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7151

9-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table 9-3. Power cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code
Index Number in
(FC), and Part Number Plug Standard Reference Country or Region
(Figure 153)
(PN)
United Kingdom BS 1363 Antigua, Bahrain, Bermuda, Brunei, 7
v 2.8 m, 250V Channel Islands, China (Hong Kong
S.A.R.), Cyprus, Fiji, Ghana,
v FC 9825
Guyana, India, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan,
v AAS PN 39M5151 Kenya, Kuwait, Malaysia, Malawi,
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7148 Malta, Nepal, Nigeria, Oman,
Polynesia, Qatar, Sierra Leone,
Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda, UK,
United Arab Emirate (Dubai),
Yemen, Zambia
Switzerland SEV SN 416534 Liechtenstein, Switzerland 8
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9828
v AAS PN 39M5158
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7150
Italy CEI 23- 16 Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya, Somalia 9
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9830
v AAS PN 39M5165
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7152
Israel S11-32-1971 Israel 10
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9827
v AAS PN 39M5172
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7149
Argentina IEC 83-A5 Argentina, Brazil, Colombia, 11
v 2.8 m, 250V Paraguay, Trinidad Tobago,
Uruguay
v FC 9834
v AAS PN 39M5068
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7154
China CCEE People's Republic of China 12
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9840
v AAS PN 39M5206
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7155
Taiwan LV* CNS 10917-3 Taiwan 13
v 2.8 m, 125V
v FC 9835
v AAS PN 39M5247
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R7158
Taiwan HV** CNS 10917-3 Taiwan 14
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9841
v AAS PN 39M5254
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R6981

Chapter 9. Parts List 9-5

Table 9-3. Power cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code
Index Number in
(FC), and Part Number Plug Standard Reference Country or Region
(Figure 153)
(PN)
Japan LV* JIS C8303, C8306 Japan 15
v 2.8 m, 125V
v FC 9842
v AAS PN 39M5199
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R6982
Japan HV** JIS C8303, C8306 Japan 16
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9843
v AAS PN 39M5186
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R6983
Korea HV** KS C8305, K60884-1 Korea 17
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9844
v AAS PN 39M5219
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R6984
India HV** IS 6538 India 18
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9845
v AAS PN 39M5226
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R6985
Brazil LV* InMetro NBR 6147 Brazil 19
v 2.8 m, 125V
v FC 9846
v AAS PN 39M5233
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R6986
Brazil HV** InMetro NBR 14136 Brazil 20
v 2.8 m, 250V
v FC 9847
v AAS PN 39M5240
v HVEC/SAP PN 23R6987
* Low Voltage

** High Voltage

9-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel
“Web User Interface Service Login”
“Connecting to the Library using the Telnet Service Port” on page A-4
“Drive or Cartridge Removal” on page “Removing or Reinstalling the Library Chassis
A-5 Cover” on page A-5
“Removing the Tape Drive from the Library” on
page A-9
“Manually Removing a Tape Cartridge from the
Drive” on page A-11
“Removing a Stuck Cartridge Magazine” on page
A-21

Web User Interface Service Login

The Web User Interface Java Applet requires Java 1.5.0 or higher for full
functionality, and is best viewed using Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher. Internet
Explorer 7.0 or higher is required for IPv6. If your computer does not have Java
installed or you need to upgrade your installation, download the latest version of
the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) for your platform from http://www.java.com/
and follow the instructions provided to enable and configure the Java Runtime
Environment for your browser.

The Web User Interface can also be used to update the library and drive firmware,
and to download error logs, drive dumps, and other library data from the library.

Before the TS2900 Tape Autoloader can be managed over a network using the Web
User Interface, you must set up the initial network configuration of the library
using the Operator Panel. For more information, see “Configuring Network
Settings” on page 3-31.

Logging in to the Web User Interface

To log in to the Web User Interface from Internet Explorer, you need to enter the IP
address of the library. The IP address can be obtained using the View Current
Information command from the Operator Panel. For example, http://192.168.1.1

When the applet launches, the following warning message appears. This message
is normal and does not indicate a problem.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 A-1

 a29z0160
Figure A-1. Java security warning message

You can click the Always trust content from this publisher checkbox to avoid the
warning message in subsequent browser sessions.

Click Run to launch the Web User Interface.

a29z0095

Figure A-2. Login window

The factory default account login and password for a Service account is the
following:
v Account: service
v Password: Contact your next level of support.

The account name and password are case sensitive. After entering your account
name and password, use your mouse to click Login or press the Enter key.

For information on account privileges, see “User Privilege Comparison” on page

A-3.

A-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Common Header Elements
All Web User Interface windows (except for the Login screen) contain the
following common elements in the header:
v Help - Click to read context-sensitive help for the associated page.
v Logoff - Click to log out of the Web User Interface.

Menus Available from the Web User Interface

Figure A-3 shows the window for a Service account.

a29z0098
Figure A-3. Service account window

For a complete description of all Web User Interface menu options, see Chapter 4,
“Operations,” on page 4-1.

User Privilege Comparison

User privilege levels are manually assigned to user accounts created within the
library. Controlling access to screens and operations within the library preserves
the integrity of the library and the data that is stored within the library.

There are four types of user privileges in the library.

v Users are allowed to monitor the library, but not perform actions that affect the
physical library.
v Superusers are allowed to operate the physical and logical library, but not
perform actions that affect the library configuration.
v Administrator users are allowed access to the entire physical library and logical
library, including configuration. One and only one administrator user must be
assigned the login name admin.
v Service users are allowed access to the entire physical library and logical library.
In addition, the Service user account can access diagnostic tools to help identify
and resolve library and drive problems. The Service user account is only
displayed in the User Access panel if logged in with a Service user login.

User privileges include:

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-3

 v Multiple users can be logged in at one time on the Web User Interface.
v Any user can be logged in to only one interface at a time.
Table A-1. Menu commands and access privileges
Menu Command User Superuser Administrator User Service User
MONITOR SYSTEM
System Summary X X X X
Library Map X X X X
MANAGE LIBRARY
Move Cartridges - X X X
Unload Drive - X X X
Clean Drive - X X X
Library State - X X X
Inventory - X X X
CONFIGURE LIBRARY
User Access - - X X
Physical - - X X
Logical - - X X
Network - - X X
| Encryption (3572-S4H, -S5H) - - X X
Date and Time - - X X
Notifications - - X X
Save/Restore - - X X
SERVICE LIBRARY
| Key Path Diagnostics (3572-S4H, -S5H) - - X X
Operator Interventions X X X X
View Library Logs X X X X
Traces - - X X
Download Drive Logs - - X X
Download Library Logs X X X X
Reset Library/Drive - - X X
Firmware Update - - X X
Usage Statistics - - X X

Connecting to the Library using the Telnet Service Port

The Telnet Service Port can be enabled to allow IBM service personnel to execute
extended troubleshooting procedures.

To enable the Telnet Service Port, have the library administrator complete the
following steps:
1. Log in to the Operator Panel.
2. Go to the Telnet Service Port item in the Service menu, and push Enter.
3. When Enable Telnet Port appears on the display, push Enter.

A-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 4. When Are you sure? appears on the display, push Enter.

To disable the Telnet Service Port, have the library administrator power cycle the
library.

Drive or Cartridge Removal

Important:
v It is strongly recommended that the drive and stuck tape be returned to IBM
for removal and recovery.
v These procedures must be performed only by a trained IBM service provider.
SSRs should claim their time against service code 33 ECA 013 when
performing this procedure.
v Inform the customer the following procedure has high risk of damaging the
drive and high risk of not being able to recover the data.

Removing or Reinstalling the Library Chassis Cover

Important: FOR REFERENCE ONLY. The customer is not authorized to remove the
cover of the library. No customer serviceable components are inside the library.

If you need to access the cartridge magazine or tape drive, complete the following
steps:
1. If possible, unload the tape drive and move the cartridge to its home position
(Operator Panel: Move Cartridge command; Web User Interface: Manage
Library—>Move Cartridges).
2. Deconfigure the drive from the server (for instructions, see your server's
documentation).
3. Turn OFF the power to the library.
4. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the library.
v For a desktop library, remove the deskside cover.
a. Remove the large pan-head screws 4 on the rear of the library
(Figure A-4).

4
a29z0012

Figure A-4. Removing screws from the rear of the library

b. Remove the flat-head screws 6 on each side securing the deskside cover
to the library, and remove the deskside cover 2 (Figure A-5 on page
A-6).

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-5

 6

a29z0011
6

Figure A-5. Removing the deskside cover

c. Remove the flat-head screws 6 on each side to remove the left 5 and
right 3 rails from the chassis (Figure A-6).

a29z0009
6

Figure A-6. Removing side rails from the library chassis

v For a rack mounted library, remove the library from the rack.
a. Remove the two round-head screws 10 on each rear bracket securing
the rear of the library to the rack (Figure A-7).

10 10
a29z0022

Figure A-7. Removing screws at the rear of the library

b. Remove the large black screws 11 from each front bracket securing the
front of the library to the rack, and slide the library chassis out of the

A-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 rack (Figure A-8).

11

a29z0021
Figure A-8. Removing screws at the front of the library

5. Remove the screws securing the library chassis cover (Figure A-9).

a29z0054

Figure A-9. Library chassis cover screw locations

6. Lift the library chassis cover off vertically (Figure A-10 on page A-8).

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-7

 a29z0055

Figure A-10. Library chassis cover removal

Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.

A-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Internal View of Library

3 4 5

a29z0005
1 2

Figure A-11. Internal components

Table A-2. Internal component descriptions

Number Component Description
1 Cartridge magazine The tape library has a single cartridge magazine that can hold up to 9
data cartridges, or 8 data cartridges with a 1-slot I/O Station.

Column 5/Tier 1 in the cartridge magazine can be configured as a

1-slot I/O Station. Column 5/Tier 2 in the cartridge magazine is
reserved for the exchange position and can be accessed by the library
only. The I/O Station is used to import and export cartridges without
interrupting normal library operation. Beginning with Column 4, a
minimum of one column can be reserved for cleaning cartridges.
Cleaning cartridges are used to clean the tape drive heads. For
configuration details, see “Physical Library Settings” on page 3-21.
2 Accessor This component contains the library robot and bar code reader. The
accessor moves cartridges to/from the following:
v I/O Station
v storage slots
v tape drive
3 Library control board The library control board manages the entire library, including the
Operator Panel and Accessor, and is responsible for monitoring the
library to ensure that the library is functioning properly. It stores vital
product data (VPD) such as library settings, serial number, library
logs, and Accessor calibration backup data.
4 Power supply The power supply is the sole source of power for the library.
| 5 Tape Drive The library supports the Ultrium 3, 4, and 5 Half-High Tape Drive.

Removing the Tape Drive from the Library

To remove the SAS tape drive from the library, complete the following steps:
1. Turn OFF the power to the library.
2. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the library.
Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-9
 3. Remove the library cover(s). See “Removing or Reinstalling the Library Chassis
Cover” on page A-5.
4. Disconnect the internal SAS cable (2 in Figure A-12).

a80hh024
1 2 3

Figure A-12. Rear panel of the SAS Half-high drive

5. If connected, disconnect the internal LDI (RS-422) cable from the LDI (RS-422)
connector (3 in Figure A-12).
6. Remove the cartridge magazine from the library.
7. Remove the drive mounting screws from the sides of the tape drive housing.
Two screws are located on each side of the drive (Figure A-13).

a29z0062

Figure A-13. Drive housing screw locations

8. Lift the tape drive out of the library chassis (Figure A-14 on page A-11).

A-10 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 a29z0063
Figure A-14. Tape drive removal

Reinstalling the Tape Drive in the Library

To reinstall the tape drive in the library, reverse the directions found in “Removing
the Tape Drive from the Library” on page A-9.

Manually Removing a Tape Cartridge from the Drive

The purpose of this section is to assist you in determining the condition of the
cartridge or the magnetic tape and to direct you to the procedure you must follow
to remove the cartridge.
Notes:
1. The best solution for recovering data on a damaged cartridge is to send it to
IBM for professional data recovery.
2. Before using this procedure, you must have exhausted all other means of
removing the tape cartridge from the drive. Use this procedure only if you
cannot remove the tape cartridge by using any other means.
3. Determine from the customer if the cartridge contains critical customer data.
If the cartridge contains sensitive data that cannot leave the site, inform the
customer that certain failure conditions diagnostics will be performed to test
the drive for continued use.
4. The following removal procedures can destroy customer data! Use extreme
care when handling or removing the customer's tape cartridges to minimize
tape damage and lost data.
5. DO NOT TOUCH the magnetic tape or tape path. Both are extremely
sensitive to the oil and salt from your skin. Use clean, lint-free gloves when
working around magnetic tape or the tape path components.
6. Electrostatic-sensitive components: Consider using an ESD Kit.
7. After you remove the tape cartridge, advise the customer to copy the data to
another cartridge and to remove this tape cartridge from service.
8. Do not use power tools or magnetic tools to perform this procedure.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-11

 9. To avoid contamination and electrostatic-discharge damage to the drive, never
touch the head or electronic components inside the drive.
10. If you cannot remove the cartridge from the drive using the following
procedures, contact your next level of support.
11. The cartridge will not eject automatically at the end of a mid-tape recovery.
Instead, the tape will be reloaded into the drive and may result in the loss of
data.
12. INTERNAL COMPONENTS OF THE DRIVE ARE DELICATE AND CAN
EASILY BE DAMAGED. EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN
MANUALLY REMOVING A CARTRIDGE THAT WILL NOT EJECT
AFTER PRESSING THE UNLOAD BUTTON.

Before You Begin

1. If you have not already done so, attempt to remove the cartridge with the
device power ON and using library manager, a host application, or the unload
button. When using the Unload button, press and hold the button for 12
seconds. This will cause the drive to eject the cartridge when it has completed
the mid-tape recovery.
2. If you have not already done so, ensure the operator has issued the appropriate
application commands to perform a rewind and unload of the cartridge. This is
to ensure that the stuck cartridge is not due to a hang condition in the
application.
3. If you have not already done so, attempt to remove the cartridge by power
cycling the drive. Look for the drive to attempt a midtape recovery.

Note: It can take up to one hour for the cartridge to rewind and unload.
4. If the cartridge unloads, inform the operator that the cartridge is unloaded. If
the cartridge does not unload, repeat steps 2 and 3 once before continuing with
this procedure.

Recommended Tools
v #1 Phillips screwdriver
v ESD Kit
v Flashlight (optional)
v #1 Flathead screwdriver (optional)

Beginning Procedure
1. Remove the drive. See “Removing the Tape Drive from the Library” on page
A-9.
2. Place the drive on a non-slip, sturdy work surface.
3. Ground yourself to the drive by using the ESD Kit.
4. Remove the cover of the drive by performing the following steps:
a. To remove the drive bezel, pull the right side of the bezel from the front of
the drive, then pull the left side of the bezel out of the frame of the drive.
b. To remove the cover of the internal drive, remove the four cover-mounting
screws (1 in (Figure A-15 on page A-13). Two screws are located on each
side of the drive. Remove the cover by lifting it up.

A-12 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 1

a80hh022
1

Figure A-15. Removing the bezel and the cover from the internal drive

5. Inspect the drive to decide which of the following conditions most closely
matches the symptom on the drive:
v “Tape Spooled off Supply Reel” - All the tape appears to be on the takeup
reel and no tape is on the supply reel (inside the cartridge). Test the drive
after the procedure is completed.
v “Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin” on page A-15 - All the tape
appears to be on the supply reel (inside the cartridge) and very little or no
tape appears to be on the takeup reel. The leader block is positioned in the
takeup reel. Return the drive after the procedure is completed.
v “Tape Broken in Mid-tape” on page A-16 - Tape appears to be on both the
supply reel (inside the cartridge) and takeup reel. Test the drive after the
procedure is completed.
v “Tape Tangled along Tape Path” on page A-17 - Tape appears to be tangled
and damaged but intact. Return the drive after the procedure is completed.
v “No Apparent Failure or Damage to Tape” on page A-18 - There appears to
be no damage or slack to the tape. Return the drive after the procedure is
completed.

Tape Spooled off Supply Reel

Important: DO NOT TOUCH THE OUTER GUIDE RAIL (2in Figure A-16 on
page A-14). THIS RAIL IS VERY DELICATE AND EASILY DAMAGED.
1. From the takeup reel, pull an arm's length of tape around the rear of the tape
path and over the head and rollers on the left side of the drive.
2. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
3. Make sure the tape is not twisted. Untwist tape if required.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of
the tape end and feed it onto the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
5. Turn the supply reel (4 in Figure A-16 on page A-14 clockwise, allowing the
moistened tape to adhere to the hub as it winds around the supply reel (inside
the cartridge).

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-13

 2

a82hd002

Figure A-16. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor

6. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel (4 in Figure A-16)
10 additional turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
7. Reassemble the drive, reversing the steps in “Beginning Procedure” on page
A-12.
8. Reassemble the library chassis. See “Ending Procedure” on page A-21.

A-14 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin

a82hd003
2

Figure A-17. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train

1 Threader intermediate gear 3 Loader motor worm gear

2 Threader mechanism gear

1. Pull out tape from the takeup reel.

Note: If there is more than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the takeup
reel, go to “Tape Broken in Mid-tape” on page A-16.
2. If there is less than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the takeup reel, cut
off the excess tape as close to the leader pin as possible.
3. Reattach the leader pin to the remaining tape.
4. Locate the threader intermediate gear (1 in Figure A-17) near the rear of the
drive. You can use your finger to rotate the threader intermediate gear (1 in
Figure A-17) and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear (2in
Figure A-17) clockwise. This draws the tape leader block assembly (LBA) into
the cartridge.
5. As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge, you should hear the leader pin
retention spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue
rolling until the threader intermediate gear (1 in Figure A-17) stops. The
LBA is in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the
cartridge.
6. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (3in Figure A-17 and 1 inFigure A-18
on page A-16) clockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it stops.
This releases the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader intermediate gear (1in Figure A-17) counterclockwise
until the leader block is in front of the Read/Write head. This moves the LBA

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-15

 out of the cartridge.

a82hd004
1 2

Figure A-18. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

1 Loader motor worm gear 2 Leader block assembly (LBA)

8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (3 in Figure A-17 on page A-15)
counterclockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it stops.
9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
10. Reassemble the drive by reversing the procedure in Step 4 in “Beginning
Procedure” on page A-12.
11. Reassemble the library chassis. See “Ending Procedure” on page A-21.

Tape Broken in Mid-tape

1. With the front of the drive facing you, pull an arm's length of tape out of the
takeup reel. From the takeup reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path
and over the head rollers on the left side of the drive.

Note: If there is less than approximately 5 cm (2 in.) of tape on the takeup reel,
go to “Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin” on page A-15.
2. From the supply reel inside the cartridge, pull approximately 0.3 m (1 ft.) of
tape.
3. Make sure the tape is not twisted. Untwist tape if required.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water, and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of
the tape end. Overlap the tape ends, loosely mending them together.
5. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
6. Turn the supply reel (4 in Figure A-19 on page A-17) clockwise, carefully
guiding the mended portion of the tape to wind around the hub of the supply
reel located inside the cartridge. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the
tape is taut. The tape must remain within the flanges of the tape guiding
rollers. Turn the supply reel (4 in Figure A-19 on page A-17) 10 additional
turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.

A-16 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2

a82hd002
4

Figure A-19. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor

7. Reassemble the drive by reversing the procedure in Step 4 in “Beginning

Procedure” on page A-12.
8. Reassemble the library chassis. See “Ending Procedure” on page A-21.

Tape Tangled along Tape Path

1. Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle.
If you find the tape to be broken, go to one of the following appropriate
procedures:
v “Tape Spooled off Supply Reel” on page A-13
v “Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin” on page A-15
v “Tape Broken in Mid-tape” on page A-16
2. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-17

 2

a82hd002

Figure A-20. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor

3. Turn the supply reel (4 in Figure A-20) clockwise.

4. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. turn the supply reel (4 in Figure A-20)
10 turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
5. Reassemble the library chassis. See “Ending Procedure” on page A-21.

No Apparent Failure or Damage to Tape

1. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

A-18 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 2

a82hd002
4

Figure A-21. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor

2. Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the supply reel
motor (4 in Figure A-21) clockwise.
3. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within
the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
Continue spooling until all tape is removed from the takeup reel (3 in
Figure A-21).
4. Locate the threader intermediate gear (1 in Figure A-22 on page A-20) near
the rear of the drive. You can use your finger to rotate the threader
intermediate gear (1 in Figure A-22 on page A-20) and slowly rotate the
threader mechanism gear (2 in Figure A-22 on page A-20) clockwise. This
draws the tape leader block assembly (LBA) into the cartridge.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-19

 1

a82hd003
2

Figure A-22. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train

1 Threader intermediate gear 3 Loader motor worm gear

2 Threader mechanism gear

5. As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge, you should hear the leader pin
retention spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue
rolling until the threader intermediate gear (1 in Figure A-22) stops. The
LBA is in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the
cartridge.
6. Rotate the loader intermediate gear (3 in Figure A-22 and 1 in
Figure A-23) clockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it stops.
This releases the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (3 in Figure A-23) counterclockwise
until the leader block is in front of the Read/Write head. This moves the LBA
out of the cartridge.
a82hd004

1 2

Figure A-23. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

1 Loader motor worm gear 2 Leader block assembly (LBA)

8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (3 in Figure A-23) counterclockwise as
viewed from the front of the drive until it stops.

A-20 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
10. Reassemble the drive by reversing the procedure in Step 4 in “Beginning
Procedure” on page A-12.
11. Reassemble the library chassis. See “Ending Procedure.”

Ending Procedure
1. Reinstall the drive in the library. See “Removing the Tape Drive from the
Library” on page A-9.
2. Reinstall the library chassis cover. See “Removing or Reinstalling the Library
Chassis Cover” on page A-5.
3. Return the defective library to IBM.

Removing a Stuck Cartridge Magazine

Complete the following steps to remove a stuck cartridge magazine from the
library:
1. Turn OFF the power to the library.
2. Manually unlock the cartridge magazine and try to remove it from the library.
Stop if you feel any resistance while pulling on the magazine (see “Unlocking
the Cartridge Magazine Manually” on page 8-1). If you cannot remove the
magazine, proceed to the next step.
3. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the library.
4. Remove the library cover(s). See “Removing or Reinstalling the Library Chassis
Cover” on page A-5.
5. Remove the magazine from the library and check for any damaged cartridges.
6. Reassemble the library, reversing the steps used to disassemble the library.
7. Return the defective library to IBM.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-21

A-22 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Appendix B. Error Codes
“Library Error Codes”
“Drive Error Codes” on page B-11
“Web User Interface Error Messages” on page B-11
“Trap Definitions (Types)” on page B-13

When an error occurs during operation of the library, the library stops the current
operation and displays an error code on the Operator Panel. Unless otherwise
noted, try to resolve the problem by cycling power to the library and retrying the
last operation.

Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is switched
OFF before powering ON again.

Library Error Codes

Table B-1. Library error codes
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
0000 No valid error code information. -
At power-on initialization, a 1. Upgrade/reinstall firmware and try again.
0001 All 4 LEDs ON
firmware error was detected.
2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Ready/Activity v If the problem is corrected, run Library
At power-on initialization, a RAM
0002 LED ON and Verify before resuming normal library
(base area) error was detected.
Error LED ON operations.
At power-on initialization, a RAM v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
0003 CHK 0003
(buffer area) error was detected. IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

1. Observe LEDs. See “Interpreting Front Panel

LEDs” on page 6-10.
2. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
page 6-11.
A usable drive could not be 3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
0008 CHK 0008
detected.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library
Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

1. Remove the Accessor locking screws. See

“Removing the Accessor Locking Screw” on
page 3-12.
2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
The Accessor locking screw has
| 0009 CHK 0009 v If the problem is corrected, run Library
not been removed.
Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
| IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 B-1

 Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required

1. Observe LEDs. See “Interpreting Front Panel

LEDs” on page 6-10.
2. Confirm the DHCP server settings.
3. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
page 6-11.
Information acquisition from the
0010 - 4. Cycle the power supply and try again.
DHCP server failed.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library
Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

1. Observe LEDs. See “Interpreting Front Panel

LEDs” on page 6-10.
2. Confirm the time server settings.
3. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
page 6-11.
Time acquisition from the NTP
0011 - 4. Cycle the power supply and try again.
server failed.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library
Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
LDI I/F error. 1. Observe LEDs. See “Interpreting Front Panel
0020 - LEDs” on page 6-10.
Transmit data abnormality
detected (NAK reception). 2. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
page 6-11.
LDI I/F error.
3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
0021 Receive timeout detected -
v If the problem is corrected, run Library
(ACK/NAK reception). Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
LDI I/F error.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
0022 Response packet reception -
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
timeout detected.
LDI I/F error.
0023 -
ENQ receive timeout detected.
LDI I/F error.
0024 Receive data abnormality -
detected.

1. Confirm the Encryption Key Manager

settings.
| 0029 LDI command ends abnormally. -
2. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
page 6-11.
3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library
Commands to the Encryption Key Verify before resuming normal library
002A - operations.
Manager over the retry limit.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
| IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

B-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required

1. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on

page 6-11.
2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Commands to the encryption v If the problem is corrected, run Library
002B -
capable drive over the retry limit. Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
LDI I/F error. Cycle the power supply and try again.
002C - v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
ACK IU event timeout detected.
before resuming normal library operations.
LDI I/F error. v If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
002D - Technical Support” on page 7-2.
Response IU event timeout
detected.
LDI I/F error.
002E Transfer Ready IU event timeout -
detected.
LDI I/F error.
002F -
Undefined error detected.

| 1. Verify that the cartridge is compatible with

| the drive in your library. See Chapter 5,
| “Media,” on page 5-1.
| A drive media error detected
| 0040 CHK 0040 2. Verify that the cartridge is not
| upon insertion.
| write-protected. See “Write-Protect Switch”
| on page 5-7.
| 3. If it is a cleaning cartridge, verify that the
| cartridge has not expired. See “Viewing the
| Library Map” on page 4-17.
| 4. Cycle the power supply and try again.
| A hardware error detected upon v If the problem is corrected, run Library
|| 0041 CHK 0041 Verify before resuming normal library
media insertion
| operations.
| v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
| IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
Cycle the power supply and try again.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
A drive load timeout error
0042 CHK 0042 before resuming normal library operations.
detected upon insertion.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-2.
Verify that the cartridge is compatible with the
drive installed in the library. See Chapter 5,
“Media,” on page 5-1.
| 0048 Incompatible medium installed. CHK 0048 v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
before resuming normal library operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-2.

Appendix B. Error Codes B-3

 Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
Response acknowledge error 1. Initiate an inventory. See “Conducting a
received from bar code reader. Library Inventory” on page 4-6 (Operator
0053 CHK 0053
Suspect the bar code reader cable Panel) or “Conducting a Library Inventory”
connection. on page 4-21 (Web User Interface).
Receive data checksum error 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
received from bar code reader. v If the problem is corrected, run Library
0056 CHK 0056
Suspect the bar code reader cable Verify before resuming normal library
connection. operations.
Invalid data received from bar v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
0057 code reader. Suspect the bar code CHK 0057 IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
reader cable connection.
A bar code reader read-error
0058 detected. Suspect the bar code CHK 0058
reader cable connection.
A bar code reader FLASH control
0059 error detected. Suspect the bar CHK 0059
code reader cable connection.
A bar code reader diagnostics
005A error detected. Suspect the bar CHK 005A
code reader cable connection.
I2C I/F error. A transfer retry
| 005B detected. Suspect the bar code CHK 005B
reader cable connection.
I2C I/F error. Interrupt timeout
| 005C detected. Suspect the bar code CHK 005C
reader cable connection.
I2C I/F error.

| 005D Invalid signal (NAK) detected. CHK 005D

Suspect the bar code reader cable
connection.
I2C I/F error.

005E Bus arbitration lost error detected. CHK 005E

Suspect the bar code reader cable
connection.
I2C I/F error.

005F Ready condition does not occur. CHK 005F

Suspect the bar code reader cable
connection.

1. Attempt to unload the cartridge from the

Accessor. See “Moving Cartridges” on page
4-5 (Operator Panel) or “Moving Cartridges”
on page 4-19 (Web User Interface).
Calibration failed because the
2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
0070 Accessor contains media. Suspect CHK 0070
the centering sensor. v If the problem is corrected, run Library
Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

B-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
Calibration failed due to an Cycle the power supply and try again.
0071 empty magazine. Suspect the CHK 0071 v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
magazine set sensor. before resuming normal library operations.
Calibration measurement invalid v If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
0072 data error. Suspect the centering CHK 0072 Technical Support” on page 7-2.
sensor, X motor, or P motor.
GET, centering check, or bar code
reader read operation failed
0074 because the Accessor contains CHK 0074
media. Suspect the centering
sensor.
PUT operation failed because the
0075 Accessor contains no media. CHK 0075
Suspect the centering sensor.

1. If the cartridge does not eject, try to unload

the cartridge from the drive using the
Operator Panel (Commands —> Unload) or
the Web User Interface (Manage Library —>
Unload). Move the cartridge from the drive
Drive does not enter EJECT state to the I/O Station. Remove the cartridge
(and media not ejected) within from the library and inspect for damage and
007C CHK 007C replace, if necessary.
200 seconds of a GET command.
Suspect the drive. 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library
Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
Drive does not enter MOUNT Cycle the power supply and try again.
state within 200 seconds of a PUT v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
007D CHK 007D
command. Suspect the drive or X before resuming normal library operations.
motor.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Drive does not enter SET state Technical Support” on page 7-2.
within 3 seconds of a PUT
007E CHK 007E
command. Suspect the drive or X
motor.

1. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on

page 6-11.
2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Drive I/F or connection error
007F occurs during a PUT operation or CHK 007F v If the problem is corrected, run Library
GET operation. Suspect the drive. Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

Appendix B. Error Codes B-5

 Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required

| X movement error #1. 1. Check the Accessor locking screw and

| remove it if it is installed. See “Removing the
During X movement, the target
| 0080 CHK 0080 Accessor Locking Screw” on page 3-12.
stop position's origin sensor error
detected. Suspect the X origin 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
sensor or X motor. v If the problem is corrected, run Library
Verify before resuming normal library
X movement error #2.
operations.
0081 During X movement, a motor CHK 0081 v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
sync error detected. Suspect the X IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
encoder sensor or X motor.
X movement error #3.

0082 During initialization, a motor sync CHK 0082

error detected. Suspect the X
encoder sensor or X motor.
During an eject operation or move
operation (to a storage position),
0083 the X origin sensor could not be CHK 0083
detected. Suspect the X origin
sensor or X motor.
During initialization, the X origin
position could not be detected.
0084 CHK 0084
Suspect the X origin sensor or X
motor.
| X calibration error #1.

| 0088 During X calibration, centering CHK 0088

| sensor OFF condition could not be
| detected.
X calibration error #2.

0089 During X calibration, centering CHK 0089

sensor ON condition could not be
detected.

1. Confirm the magazine is closed.

2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
During X operation, the cartridge v If the problem is corrected, run Library
008F magazine was removed. Suspect CHK 008F Verify before resuming normal library
the magazine set sensor. operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

1. Confirm the media is compatible.

2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Failed to detect media in the
Accessor at completion of GET v If the problem is corrected, run Library
00B0 CHK 00B0 Verify before resuming normal library
operation. Suspect the centering
sensor, X motor, or P motor. operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

B-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
Cycle the power supply and try again.
No media is contained in the
v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
specified cell (Cell Empty).
00B1 CHK 00B1 before resuming normal library operations.
Suspect the centering sensor, X
motor, or P motor. v If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-2.

1. If the cartridge remains in the Accessor, try

Media detected in the Accessor at to move the cartridge from the Accessor to
completion of centering check the I/O Station using the Operator Panel or
00B2 CHK 00B2 Web User Interface. Remove the cartridge
operation. Suspect the centering
sensor. from the library and inspect for damage and
replace, if necessary.
2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library
Media detected in the Accessor at Verify before resuming normal library
00B3 completion of PUT operation. CHK 00B3 operations.
Suspect the centering sensor.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

| Accessor error #1. 1. Check the Accessor locking screw and

| remove it if it is installed. See “Removing the
Reverse REV position (PP1) error
| Accessor Locking Screw” on page 3-12.
00B8 (Accessor origin not detected or CHK 00B8
FWD position detected). Suspect 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
the P origin sensor, FWD sensor, v If the problem is corrected, run Library
or P motor. Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
Accessor error #2.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
Forward FWD position (PP2) IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
00B9 error (Accessor origin detected or CHK 00B9
FWD not detected). Suspect the P
origin sensor, FWD sensor, or P
motor.
Accessor error #3.

PUT/GET/bar code reader

position (PP4/PP5/PPBF/PPBR)
00BA error (Accessor origin or FWD
CHK 00BA
detected, or cell full). Suspect the
P origin sensor, FWD sensor, or P
motor.
During initialization, the Accessor
origin could not be detected.
00BC CHK 00BC
Suspect the P origin sensor, FWD
sensor, or P motor.
During Accessor movement, the
movement stop condition
00BD CHK 00BD
detected. Suspect the P encoder
sensor or P motor.
No gap condition detected at the
completion of Accessor operation.
00BF Suspect the centering sensor, P CHK 00BF
origin sensor, FWD sensor, or P
motor.

Appendix B. Error Codes B-7

 Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required

1. Confirm the magazine is closed.

2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Accessor operation disabled
| because a cartridge magazine was v If the problem is corrected, run Library
| 00C0 CHK 00C0 Verify before resuming normal library
removed. Suspect the magazine
| set sensor. operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
Centering calibration error #1. Cycle the power supply and try again.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
During centering calibration,
00C8 CHK 00C8 before resuming normal library operations.
centering sensor OFF condition
could not be detected. Suspect the v If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
centering sensor or P motor. Technical Support” on page 7-2.

Centering calibration error #2.

During centering calibration,

00C9 centering sensor ON condition CHK 00C9
could not be detected. Suspect the
centering sensor, X motor, or P
motor.

Checksum error detected during 1. Confirm the firmware file version.

00D0 CHK 00D0
firmware update. 2. Reinstall the firmware file.
3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Firmware ID error detected
00D1 CHK 00D1 v If the problem is corrected, run Library
during firmware update.
Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
Boot information error detected v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
00D2 CHK 00D2
during firmware update.
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

1. Initiate an inventory. See “Conducting a

Library Inventory” on page 4-6 (Operator
Bar code reader is not in Panel) or “Conducting a Library Inventory”
maintenance mode during bar on page 4-21 (Web User Interface).
code reader firmware update 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
00D3 CHK 00D3
(operation interrupted). Suspect v If the problem is corrected, run Library
the bar code reader cable Verify before resuming normal library
connection. operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

Magazine failed to unlock. 1. Cycle the power supply and try again.
00D9 Suspect the magazine or CHK 00D9 2. Manually unlock the magazine, remove the
magazine sensor. magazine from the library, and inspect it for
damage.
v If not damaged, return it to the library and
I/O Station failed to unlock. run Library Verify before resuming normal
00DA Suspect the magazine or CHK 00DA library operations.
magazine sensor.
v If damaged, replace the magazine.

B-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required

1. Initiate an inventory. See “Conducting a

Library Inventory” on page 4-6 (Operator
Panel) or “Conducting a Library Inventory”
An error detected during bar code on page 4-21 (Web User Interface).
reader firmware check. Suspect 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
00DD CHK 00DD
the bar code reader cable v If the problem is corrected, run Library
connection. Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2).
Write operation not finished Cycle the power supply and try again.
00E0 within 1 ms when writing data to CHK 00E0 v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
flash memory. before resuming normal library operations.
Clear operation not finished v If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
00E1 within 10 seconds when clearing a CHK 00E1 Technical Support” on page 7-2.
sector in flash memory.
Error detected in tape library
00E2 configuration stored in flash CHK 00E2
memory.
Checksum error detected in flash
00E3 CHK 00E3
memory.
Sensor error #1.

Accessor encoder sensor B error

00F0 detected during blink check.
CHK 00F0
Suspect the Accessor encoder
sensor B.

Appendix B. Error Codes B-9

Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
Sensor error #2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
v If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
Accessor encoder sensor A error
00F1 CHK 00F1 before resuming normal library operations.
detected during blink check.
Suspect the Accessor encoder v If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
sensor A. Technical Support” on page 7-2.

Sensor error #3.

00F2 X encoder sensor error detected CHK 00F2

during blink check. Suspect the X
encoder sensor.
Sensor error #4.

00F3 Magazine sensor error detected CHK 00F3

during blink check. Suspect the
magazine sensor.
Sensor error #5.

00F8 X origin sensor error detected CHK 00F8

during blink check. Suspect the X
origin sensor.
Sensor error #6.

00F9 Cartridge sensor error detected CHK 00F9

during blink check. Suspect the
cartridge sensor.
Sensor error #7.

Accessor forward sensor error

00FA detected during blink check.
CHK 00FA
Suspect the Accessor forward
sensor.
Sensor error #8.

Accessor origin sensor error

00FB detected during blink check.
CHK 00FB
Suspect the Accessor origin
sensor.

B-10 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Drive Error Codes
Table B-2. Drive error codes
Code (H) Description Panel indication Action Required
Invalid data sent to drive. 1. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables”
0200 CHK 0200 on page 6-11.
NAK detected.
2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Timeout error occurred while
0201 CHK 0201 v If the problem is corrected, run Library
waiting for response from drive.
Verify before resuming normal library
0203 Drive disconnected. CHK 0203 operations.
0205 Drive busy. CHK 0205 v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
Command could not be
0206 executed because drive is not CHK 0206
mounted.
| 020E Drive error detected. CHK 020E
| 020F Unsupported drive detected. CHK 020F

1. Release the drive Prevent Medium

Removal state from the host.
2. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables”
on page 6-11.
Media could not be ejected
0222 because drive is in Prevent CHK 0222 3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Medium Removal state. v If the problem is corrected, run Library
Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.

Web User Interface Error Messages

Table B-3. Web user error messages
Title Message Issuing Panel
Error Users full. User Access
You cannot remove yourself. User Access
Parameter Error Login failure. Login
Unsupported update file. Firmware Update
Invalid parameter found in [***]. Configure Library
Please input parameter of [***]. Configure Library
Password parameter error. User Access
User name parameter error. User Access
Not enough role. User Access
| A user name unmatched. User Access
| A user is already existed. User Access
Users full. User Access
Flush ROM write error detected. User Access
User information access failure. User Access

Appendix B. Error Codes B-11

 Table B-3. Web user error messages (continued)
Title Message Issuing Panel
Command Error Move command execution failure. Move Cartridges
(Code:“****”)
| Unload command execution Unload Drive
| failure:[****].
Drive not ready. Unload Drive,
Download Drive Logs,
Firmware Update
Medium not present. Unload Drive
Online command execution Library State
failure:[****].
Offline command execution Library State
failure:[****].
Reset command execution Reset Library/Drive
failure:[****].
Inventory command execution Inventory
failure:[****].
“Normal Dump” command execution Download Drive Logs
failure:[****].
“Force Dump” command execution Download Drive Logs
failure:[****].
Restore failure. Save/Restore

Library serial number is unmatched

Writing to cookie was failure. All

The configuration data was not saved

to cookie.
| Cleaning Command Error Illegal medium. Clean Drive
Source element empty. Clean Drive
Destination element full. Clean Drive
Drive failure. Clean Drive
Prevent medium removal. Clean Drive
During import/export element Clean Drive
access.
Gap detected. Clean Drive
| Not loaded. Clean Drive
| Expired medium. Clean Drive
Write protect error. Clean Drive
Cleaning execution failure: [****]. Clean Drive
I/O Error File open failure. Download Drive Logs,
Download Library Logs,
Save/Restore,
Firmware Update
Unsupported file. Save/Restore,
Firmware Update

B-12 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table B-3. Web user error messages (continued)
Title Message Issuing Panel
Network Error *** command transmission failure. Manage Library
*** information access failure. All
Library logs download failure. Download Library Logs

Please retry download.

| Email submit failure. Notifications
SNMP trap submit failure. Notifications
Log data access failure. Traces,
View Library Logs
Port open failure [**.**.**.**:****]. Applet 3 times retry

Do you wish to retry?

Port open failure [**.**.**.**:****]. Displayed after 3 unsuccessful
attempts using the Java Applet.
Please check the library and the
network condition setting.

Applet shutdown.
Web interface version is not matched All
between Library and Java Applet.

Please shut a browser and restart the

Applet.

There is a possibility of
malfunctioning if you proceed
operation from Web.

Please clear the cache of Java when

this message appears even if it
restart.
Library Busy Library information updating now. All

Can not access library information

Trap Definitions (Types)

The TS3400 supports the following types of SNMP traps.
Table B-4. Trap list
Clean Drive Attention Error
Trap ID Event Type Description
LED LED LED
1 Emergency v Drive error - - ON

2 v Library error - - ON

21 Error v Drive error - - ON

22 v Library error - - ON

Appendix B. Error Codes B-13

Table B-4. Trap list (continued)
Clean Drive Attention Error
Trap ID Event Type Description
LED LED LED
51 Warning v Drive error - - ON

(Drive) v Library error

v Endurance frequency attainment
52

(Library)
53 v Cleaning demand reception from ON - -
drive
(Drive)
54 v Cleaning cartridge demand for an - ON -
exchange
(Library)
101 Information v Beginning of inventory - - -

(Drive) v Change in library operation mode

v Beginning of medium move
102
v Completion of medium move
(Library) v Library/Drive not ready
v Library/Drive to online
v Magazine unlock operation
v I/O Station unlock operation

B-14 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags
“TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library”
“TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive” on page C-3

This appendix is intended to provide additional information to the reader about

the tape library and tape drive. All error code and diagnostic information
contained in this chapter cannot be accessed from the Operator Panel of the
Library. The Operator Panel will, however, display other library error codes and
drive error codes when problems occur. For a listing of Operator Panel error
messages, see Appendix B, “Error Codes,” on page B-1.

TapeAlert is a standard that defines status conditions and problems experienced by

devices such as tape drives, autoloaders, and libraries. The standard enables a
server to read TapeAlert messages (called flags) from a tape drive. The server reads
the flags from Log Sense Page 0x2E.

This library is compatible with TapeAlert technology, which provides error and
diagnostic information about the drives and the library to the server. Because
library and drive firmware may change periodically, the SNMP interface in the
library does not require code changes if devices add additional TapeAlerts that are
not supported today. However, should this occur the MIB is written to minimize
impact to the SNMP monitoring station. At the time of this writing, the TapeAlert
flags in this appendix correctly represent TapeAlerts that will be sent. The MIB file
should not be taken to mean that all traps that are defined in the MIB will be sent
by the library or that they will be sent in the future.

TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library

Table C-1. TapeAlert flags supported by the library
Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required Type1
Number
01 Library Hardware The library mechanism 1. Cycle the power supply and try again. C
A is having trouble
2. If the problem persists, see “Contacting
communicating with
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
the tape drive.
02 Library Hardware The library mechanism W
B has a hardware fault.
03 Library Hardware Library mechanism has 1. Reset the library. For details, see C
C a hardware fault that “Rebooting the Drive” on page 4-8.
requires a reset to
2. Restart the operation.
recover.
3. If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
04 Library Hardware The library mechanism 1. Cycle the power supply and try again. C
D has a hardware fault
2. If the problem persists, see “Contacting
that is not mechanism
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
related, or requires
power cycle to recover.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 C-1

Table C-1. TapeAlert flags supported by the library (continued)
Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required Type1
Number
06 Library Interface The library has 1. Check all cables and cable connections. C
identified an interface
2. Restart the operation.
fault.
3. If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
08 Library Library preventative Preventative maintenance of the library is W
Maintenance maintenance required. required. Consult the library user's manual for
device-specific preventative maintenance tasks.
12 Library Stray A cartridge has been 1. Try unloading the cartridge from the drive C
Tape left in the drive inside using the Operator Panel or Web User
the library by a Interface.
previous hardware
v If the cartridge unloads, move the
fault.
cartridge from the drive to the I/O
Station. Remove the cartridge and inspect
for damage. If not damaged, return the
cartridge to the library. Run Library
Verify before resuming normal library
operations.
v If the cartridge did not unload from the
drive, cycle the power supply and try
again.
2. If the problem persists, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-2.
13 Library Pick There is a potential No action is required. W
Retry problem with the drive
ejecting a cartridge
short or with the
library mechanism
picking a cartridge
from a slot.
14 Library Place There is a potential No action is required. W
Retry problem with the
library mechanism
placing a cartridge into
a slot.
16 Library I/O The operation has Close the I/O Station. W
Station failed because the
library I/O Station is
open.
17 Library Mailslot Mechanical problem There is a mechanical problem with the library C
with the I/O Station. I/O Station.
18 Library Magazine Library magazine not The library cannot operate without the C
present. magazine.
1. Insert the magazine into the library.
2. Restart the operation.
21 Library Offline Library manually The library has been manually turned offline I
turned offline. and is unavailable for use.
22 Library Drive Library turned internal The drive inside the library has been taken I
Offline drive offline. offline. This is for information purposes only.
No action is required.

C-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table C-1. TapeAlert flags supported by the library (continued)
Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required Type1
Number
23 Library Scan There is a potential No action is required. W
Retry problem with the bar
code label of the
scanner hardware in
the library mechanism.
28 Power Supply PSU failure inside the The power supply has failed inside the library. W
library subsystem. See “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on
page 7-2.
1. C = Critical: Needs immediate action.
W = Warning: Action to be taken.
I = Information: Information for user.

TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive

Table C-2. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium tape drive
Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required
Number
3 Hard error Set for any unrecoverable read, write, or See the action required for Flag Number
positioning error (this flag is set in 4, 5, or 6, if set, in this table.
conjunction with flags 4, 5, or 6).
4 Media Set for any unrecoverable read, write, or Replace the tape cartridge.
positioning error that is due to a faulty
tape cartridge.
5 Read failure Set for any unrecoverable read error If Flag Number 4 is also set, the tape
where the isolation is uncertain and cartridge is defective. Replace the tape
failure could be due to a faulty tape cartridge.
cartridge or drive hardware.
6 Write failure Set for any unrecoverable write or If Flag Number 9 is also set, make sure
positioning error where isolation is that the write-protect switch is set so
uncertain and failure could be due to a that data can be written to the tape. See
faulty tape cartridge. “Write-Protect Switch” on page 5-7.

If Flag Number 4 is also set, the tape

cartridge is defective. Replace the tape
cartridge.
7 Media life Set when the tape cartridge reaches its 1. Copy the data to another tap
end of life (EOL). cartridge.
2. Discard the old (EOL) tape.
8 Not data grade Set when the tape cartridge is not Replace the tape cartridge with a
data-grade. Any data that you back up data-grade tape cartridge.
to the tape is at risk.
9 Write protect Set when the tape drive detects that the Ensure that the cartridge's write-protect
tape cartridge is write-protected. switch is set so that data can be written
to the tape. See “Write-Protect Switch”
on page 5-7.
10 No removal Set when the tape drive receives an Refer to the documentation for your
UNLOAD command after the server server's operating system.
prevented the tape cartridge from being
removed.

Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags C-3

Table C-2. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium tape drive (continued)
Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required
Number
11 Cleaning media Set when a cleaning tape is loaded into No action required. Status only.
the drive.
12 Unsupported Set when a non-supported cartridge Replace the invalid cartridge with a
format type is loaded into the drive or when supported tape cartridge.
the cartridge format has been corrupted.
14 Unrecoverable Set when the operation failed because Do not attempt to extract the tape
snapped tape the tape in the drive snapped. cartridge. See “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-2.
15 Cartridge memory Set when a cartridge memory (CM) Replace the tape cartridge.
chip failure failure is detected on the loaded tape
cartridge.
16 Forced eject Set when a tape cartridge was unloaded No action required. Status only.
manually while the drive was reading
or writing.
17 Media loaded is Set when a cartridge marked as No action required. Status only.
Read-only format read-only is loaded into the drive. The
flag is cleared when the cartridge is
ejected.
18 Tape directory Set when the tape drive detects that the Re-read all data from the tape to rebuild
corrupted in tape directory in the cartridge memory the tape directory.
cartridge memory has been corrupted.
19 Nearing media life Set when the tape cartridge is nearing 1. Copy the data to another tape
its specified end of life. It is cleared cartridge.
when the cartridge is removed from the
2. Replace the tape cartridge.
drive.
20 Clean now Set when the tape drive detects that it Clean the tape drive.
needs cleaning.
21 Clean periodic Set when the tape drive detects that it Clean the tape drive as soon as possible.
needs routine cleaning. The drive can continue to operate, but
requires cleaning soon.
22 Expired cleaning Set when the tape drive detects a Replace the cleaning cartridge.
media cleaning cartridge that has expired.
23 Invalid cleaning Set when the drive expects a cleaning Use a valid cleaning cartridge.
cartridge cartridge to be loaded and the loaded
cartridge is not a cleaning cartridge.
30 Hardware A Set when a hardware failure occurs that See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
requires that you reset the tape drive to on page 7-2.
recover.
31 Hardware B Set when the tape drive fails its internal Note the error code on the
Power-On Self-Tests (POSTs). single-character display and see
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on
page 7-2.
32 Interface Set when the tape drive detects a See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
problem with the host interface. on page 7-2.
33 Eject media Set when a failure occurs that requires Unload the tape cartridge, then reinsert
the tape cartridge to be unloaded from and restart the operation. If this fails,
the drive. use different media.

C-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table C-2. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium tape drive (continued)
Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required
Number
34 Download fail Set when an FMR image is Check the FMR image is correct. If
unsuccessfully downloaded to the tape necessary, download the correct FMR
drive via the SAS interface. image.
36 Drive temperature Set when the drive temperature sensor See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
indicates that the drive's temperature on page 7-2.
exceeds the recommended temperature
of the library.
37 Drive voltage Set when the drive detects power See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
supply voltages that approach or exceed on page 7-2.
the specified voltage limits.
38 Predictive failure of Set when a hardware failure of the tape See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
drive hardware drive is predicted. on page 7-2.
39 Diagnostics Set when the tape drive detects a failure See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
required that requires diagnostics for isolation. on page 7-2.
51 Tape directory Set when the tape directory on the tape Use your backup software to rebuild the
invalid at unload cartridge that was previously unloaded tape directory by reading all the data.
is corrupted. The file-search
performance is degraded.
52 Tape system area Set when the tape cartridge that was Copy the data to another tape cartridge,
write failure previously unloaded could not write its then discard the old tape cartridge.
system area successfully.
53 Tape system area Set when the tape system area could not Copy the data to another tape cartridge,
read failure be read successfully at load time. then discard the old tape cartridge.
55 Load failure Set when a hardware malfunction If the tape cartridge will not load in the
prevents the tape cartridge from being drive:
loaded into the drive, or when a tape 1. Remove the tape cartridge from the
cartridge is stuck in the drive. library and inspect it for damage. If
damaged, discard it.
2. Insert another tape cartridge into the
tape drive. If the problem persists,
see “Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-2.

If the tape cartridge is stuck in the

drive:
1. Attempt to unload the tape from the
drive using the host backup
application that is currently using
the drive, or via the remote or local
UI.
2. If the cartridge will still not unload,
see “Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-2.

Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags C-5

Table C-2. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium tape drive (continued)
Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required
Number
56 Unload failure Set when a drive hardware error 1. Unload the cartridge from the drive
prevents the tape cartridge from being using the Operator Panel or the Web
unloaded from the tape drive, or when User Interface.
the tape cartridge is stuck in the drive.
2. Try a power cycle of the entire
library. This causes the drive to reset
and attempt to rewind and unload
when power is restored. If the
cartridge unloads, remove it from
the library and inspect it. If
damaged, discard it.
3. Try to unload the cartridge from the
drive again using the Operator Panel
or the Web User Interface.
4. If the cartridge will still not unload
from the drive, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-2.
59 WORM Media Set when the drive determines that the 1. Copy the data to another WORM
integrity check data on the tape is suspect from a tape cartridge.
failed WORM point of view.
2. Discard the old WORM tape.
60 WORM Media Set when the drive rejects a write Append the information on a WORM
overwrite operation because the rules for allowing tape cartridge or write the data to a
attempted WORM writes have not been met. Data non-WORM cartridge.
can only be appended to WORM media.
Overwrites to WORM media are not
allowed.

C-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix D. Sense Data
“Sense Key Definitions”
“Library Sense Data” on page D-2
“Tape Drive Sense Data” on page D-3

When a drive encounters an error, it makes sense data available. You can use IBM
device drivers to examine the sense data and determine errors. Instructions for
downloading, installing, and properly configuring the IBM device drivers are
available in the IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide. The IBM
device drivers may conflict with some commercial software applications unless
properly configured. To avoid conflicts on Windows operating systems, refer to
your device driver's procedures for setting the driver to manual startup mode. For
applications that use Open Systems device drivers that are provided by IBM (for
example, AIX®, Linux, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, Windows 2003, and Windows 2000), the
IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide contains information about
how to obtain sense data after an error has occurred.

If your application uses other device drivers, see the appropriate documentation
for those drivers to obtain the sense data.

Raw sense data (as returned from the drive) is documented in the IBM TotalStorage
LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference.

Sense Key Definitions

Table D-1. Sense key definitions
SK Definition
00 No Sense
01 Recovered Error
02 Not Ready
03 Media Error
04 Hardware Error
05 Illegal Request
06 Unit Attention
07 Data Protect
08 Blank Check
09 Reserved
0A Reserved
0B Aborted Command
0C Reserved
0D Volume Overflow
0E Reserved
0F Reserved

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 D-1

 Library Sense Data
Table D-2 lists the Additional Sense Codes (ASC) and Additional Sense Code
Qualifiers (ASCQ) associated with the reported Sense Keys.

A sense key of 00h (no sense) has no ASC/ASCQ associated with it. A few
ASC/ASCQs can be associated with more than one sense key. The sense keys that
can give a particular ASC/ASCQ are indicated within the Sense Key column.
Table D-2. Library sense data
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
No Sense (00) 00 00 No sense
30 03 Cleaning cartridge installed
Recovered Error (01) 5B 02 Log counter at maximum
Not Ready (02) 04 00 Logical unit not ready, cause not
reportable
04 01 Logical unit is in process of becoming
ready
04 03 Manual intervention required
3A 02 Media not present (tray open)
80 05 During reprogramming mode
Hardware Error (04) 15 01 Mechanical position error
40 nn Diagnostic failure on component nn
(80h-ffh)
44 00 Internal target failure
| 53 00 Media load or eject failed
80 07 NVRAM failure
Illegal Request (05) 1A 00 Parameter list length error
20 00 Invalid command operation code
21 01 Invalid element address
24 00 Invalid field in CDB
25 00 Logical unit not supported
26 00 Invalid field in parameter list
30 00 Incompatible medium installed
3B 0D Media destination element full
3B 0E Media source element empty
3B 83 Source drive not unloaded
53 02 Media removal prevented
80 10 Drive failure
80 20 Exchange slot full
| 80 21 Cartridge wrong insertion

D-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Table D-2. Library sense data (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Unit Attention (06) 28 00 Not-ready to ready transition, media may
have changed
28 01 Import or export element accessed
29 00 Power ON occurred
2A 02 Log parameter changed
3F 01 Microcode has been changed
41 FE Drive error message detected*
Aborted Command (0B) 41 nn LDI command failure**
* This code is preserved only in the library log when “FID” or “ATTN DRV” message is
received from the tape drive. This code is not reported to the host server.

** This code is preserved only in the library log. This code is not reported to the host
server.

Tape Drive Sense Data

Table D-3. Ultrium Tape drive sense data
Bit Address or Name
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Valid Error Code
Address
Bit
1 Segment Number x'00'
2 Filemark EOM ILI Reserved Sense Key

(End of (Incorrect See “Sense Key Definitions” on page D-1.

medium) length
indicator
3 Information byte (most significant byte)
4-5 Information bytes
6 Information byte (least significant byte)
7 Additional sense length
8-11 Command specific information bytes
12-13 For Ultrium Tape drive sense data for Bytes 12 and 13, see Table D-4 on page D-5.
14 Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) ID
15 SKSV C/D Reserved BPV Bit pointer

(Bit pointer
valid)
16-17 SKSV =0: First Error Fault Symptom Code (FSC); SKSV = 1: Field Pointer
18-19 First Error Flag Data
20 Reserved (0)
21 CLN Reserved Reserved VolValid
22-28 Volume Label
29 Current Wrap

Appendix D. Sense Data D-3

Table D-3. Ultrium Tape drive sense data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
30-33 Relative LPOS
34 SCSI Address
35 Frame number Drive number
36-39 Port Identifier (Relative Target Port Address) Reporting Sense

This is the hashed SAS address of the drive port (for example, F32A94) with byte 36 being reserved.
40 Tape Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Relative Target Port Reporting Sense
Directory
Valid 0: Reserved

1: Relative Target Port 1 (Port 0)

2: Relative Target Port 2 (Port 1)

3: Relative Target Port 3 (Library

Port)
41 Host Command (SCSI Opcode)
42 Density Type Media Type (Vendor Reserved)

0: No media present

1: Gen1 (384 track)

2: Gen2 (512 track)

3: Gen3 (704 track)

43-44 Volume Label Cartridge Type
45-48 Logical Block Number

(Current LBA that would be reported in Read Position command)

49-52 Data Set Number
53-54 1st Error FSC
55-56 1st Error Flag Data
57-58 2nd Error FSC
59-60 2nd Error Flag Data
61-62 Next-to-Last Error FSC
63-64 Next-to-Last Error Flag Data
65-66 Last Error FSC
67-68 Last Error Flag Data
69 LPOS Region
70-85 ERP Summary Information
86-89 Product Revision Label: YMDV

(As defined in Standard Inquiry; this is also known as the Code Level)
90-95 Reserved (0)

D-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table D-4. Ultrium Tape drive sense data - Bytes 12 and 13
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ Description
00 00 No additional sense - The flags in the sense data indicate the reason for the
command failure
00 01 Filemark detected - A Read or Space command terminated early due to an FM. The
FM flag is set.
00 02 EOM - A Write or Write File Marks command failed because the physical end of tape
was encountered, or a Read or Space command encountered EOM. The EOM flag is
set.
00 04 BOM - A space command ended at Beginning of Tape. The EOM bit is also set.
00 05 EOD - Read or Space command terminated early because End of Data was
encountered.
04 00 Cause not reportable - A cartridge is present in the drive, but it is in the process of
being unloaded.
04 01 Becoming Ready - A media access command was received during a front panel
initiated load or an immediate reported load command.
04 02 Initializing Command Required - A cartridge is present in the drive, but is not
logically loaded. A Load command is required.
04 03 Manual Intervention Required - A cartridge is present in the drive but could not be
loaded or unloaded without manual intervention.
0C 00 Write Error - A Write operation has failed. This is probably due to bad media, but
may be hardware related.
11 00 Unrecovered Read Error - A Read operation failed. This is probably due to bad
media, but may be hardware related.
11 12 Auxiliary memory read error. The drive reported that it is unable to read the
Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge.
14 00 Recorded Entity Not Found - A space or Locate command failed because a format
violation prevented the target from being found.
14 03 End Of Data not found - A Read type operation failed because a format violation
related to a missing EOD data set.
14 10 Not Ready - Auxiliary memory not accessible. The drive is not able to become ready
because it is unable to access the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge.
1A 00 Parameter list length error - The amount of parameter data sent is incorrect.
20 00 Invalid Command Operation Code - The Operation Code in the command was not a
valid Operation Code.
24 00 Invalid field in CDB - An invalid field has been detected in a Command Descriptor
Block.
25 00 LUN not supported - The command was addressed to a non-existent logical unit
number.
26 00 Invalid Field in Parameter List - An invalid field has been detected in the data sent
during the data phase.
27 00 Write Protect - A Write type operation has been requested on a cartridge which has
been write protected.
28 00 Not Ready to Ready Transition - A cartridge has been loaded successfully into the
drive and is now ready to be accessed.
29 00 Reset - The drive has powered on, received a reset signal or a bus device reset signal
since the initiator last accessed it.

Appendix D. Sense Data D-5

Table D-4. Ultrium Tape drive sense data - Bytes 12 and 13 (continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ Description
2A 01 Mode Parameters Changed - The Mode parameters for the drive have been changed
by an initiator other than the one issuing the command.
30 00 Incompatible Media Installed - A write type operation could not be executed because
it is not supported on the cartridge type that is loaded.
30 01 Unknown Format - An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge in
the drive is of a format not supported by the drive.
30 02 Incompatible Format - An operation could not be completed because the Logical
Format is not correct.
30 03 Cleaning Cartridge Installed - An operation could not be carried out because the
cartridge in the drive is a cleaning cartridge.
30 07 Cleaning Failure - A cleaning operation was attempted, but could not be completed
for some reason.
30 0C Data Protect - WORM overwrite attempted. The drive rejected a write operation
because it would have resulted in an overwrite. Overwrite is not allowed on WORM
media.
30 0D Medium Error - WORM integrity check. The drive rejected a Read or Write operation
because the cartridge is a suspicious WORM cartridge.
31 00 Media format corrupted - Data could not be read because the format on tape is not
valid, but is a known format. A failure occurred attempting to write the FID.
37 00 Rounded parameter - A Mode Select command parameter has been rounded because
the drive can not store it with the accuracy of the command.
3A 00 Media Not Present - A media access command has been received when there is no
cartridge loaded.
3B 00 Sequential Positioning Error - A command has failed and left the logical position at
an unexpected location.
3D 00 Invalid bits in identify Message - An illegal Identify Message has been received at
the drive at the start of a command.
3E 00 Logical Unit has not Self-Configured - The drive has just powered on and has not
completed its self test sequence and can not process commands.
3F 01 Code Download - The firmware in the drive has just been changed by a Write Buffer
command.
40 xx Diagnostic failure - A diagnostic test has failed. The xx (ASCQ) is a vendor specific
code indicating the failing component.
43 00 Message Error - A message could not be sent or received due to excessive
transmission errors.
44 00 Internal target failure - A hardware failure has been detected in the drive that has
caused the command to fail.
45 00 Select/Reset Failure - An attempt to reselect an initiator in order to complete the
command has failed.
4B 00 Data Phase Error - A command could not be completed because too many parity
errors occurred during the Data phase.
4E 00 Overlapped Commands - An initiator selected the drive even though it already had
a command outstanding in the drive.
50 00 Write Append Error - A write type command failed because the point at which to
append data was unreadable.
51 00 Erase failure - An Erase command failed to erase the required area on the media.

D-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table D-4. Ultrium Tape drive sense data - Bytes 12 and 13 (continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ Description
52 00 Cartridge fault - A command could not be completed due to a fault in the tape
cartridge.
53 00 Media Load/Eject Failed - (Sense Key 03) An attempt to load or eject the cartridge
failed due to a problem with the cartridge.
53 00 Media Load/Eject Failed - (Sense Key 04) An attempt to load or eject the cartridge
failed due to a problem with the drive.
53 02 Media Removal Prevented - An Unload command has failed to eject the cartridge
because media removal has been prevented.
5D 00 Failure Prediction Threshold - Failure Prediction thresholds have been exceeded
indicating that a failure may occur soon.
5D FF Failure Prediction False - A Mode Select command has been used to test for Failure
Prediction system.
82 82 Drive requires cleaning - The drive has detected that a cleaning operation is required
to maintain good operation.
82 83 Bad Code Detected - The data transferred to the drive during a firmware upgrade is
corrupt or incompatible with drive hardware.
Sense Key 0 (No Sense)
EE 13 Encryption - Key Translate
EF 13 Encryption - Key Translate EKM
Sense Key 3 (Medium Error)
30 02 Encryption - Encryption feature is not enabled so format/processing is not
supported.
EE 60 Encryption - Proxy Command Error
EE D0 Encryption - Data Read Decryption Failure
EE D1 Encryption - Data Read after Write Decryption Failure
EE E0 Encryption - Key Translation Failure
EE E1 Encryption - Key Translation Ambiguous
EE F0 Encryption - Decryption Fenced (Read)
EE F1 Encryption - Encryption Fenced (Write)
Sense Key 4 (Hardware Error)
EE 0E Encryption - Key Service Timeout
EE 0F Encryption - Key Service Failure
40 00 Encryption - Failure Hardware, POST or Module Failure
Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request)
EE 00 Encryption - Key Service Not Enabled
EE 01 Encryption - Key Service Not Configured
EE 02 Encryption - Key Service Not Available
EE 10 Encryption - Key Required
EE 20 Encryption - Key Count Exceeded
EE 21 Encryption - Key Alias Exceeded
EE 22 Encryption - Key Reserved
EE 23 Encryption - Key Conflict

Appendix D. Sense Data D-7

Table D-4. Ultrium Tape drive sense data - Bytes 12 and 13 (continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ Description
EE 24 Encryption - Key Method Change
EE 25 Encryption - Key Format Not Supported
EE 26 Encryption - Unauthorized Request - dAK
EE 27 Encryption - Unauthorized Request - dSK
EE 28 Encryption - Unauthorized Request - eAK
EE 29 Encryption - Authentication Failure
EE 2A Encryption - Invalid RDKi
EE 2B Encryption - Key Incorrect
EE 2C Encryption - Key Wrapping Failure
EE 2D Encryption - Sequencing Failure
EE 2E Encryption - Unsupported Type
EE 2F Encryption - New Key Encrypted Write Pending
EE 30 Encryption - Prohibited Request
EE 31 Encryption - Key Unknown
EE 32 Encryption - Keystore Related Problem
EE 42 Encryption - EKM Challenge Pending
EE E2 Encryption - Key Translation Disallowed
EE FF Encryption - Security Prohibited Function
EF 01 Encryption - Key Service Not Configured
26 11 Encryption - Incomplete Key - Associate Data Set
26 12 Encryption (T10) - Vendor Specific Reference Key Not Found
55 08 Encryption (T10) - Maximum Number of Supplemental Keys Exceeded
Sense Key 6 (Unit Attention)
EE 12 Encryption - Key Change Detected
EE 18 Encryption - Changed (Read)
EE 19 Encryption - Changed (Write)
EE 40 Encryption - EKM Identifier Changed
EE 41 Encryption - EKM Challenge Changed
EE 50 Encryption - Initiator Identifier Changed
EE 51 Encryption - Initiator Response Changed
2A 11 Encryption - Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Another I_T Nexus
2A 12 Encryption - Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Vendor Specific Event
Sense Key 7 (Data Protect)
EF 10 Encryption - Key Required
EF 11 Encryption - Key Generation
EF 13 Encryption - Key Translate
EF 1A Encryption - Key Optional
EF C0 Encryption - No Operation
26 10 Encryption - Data Decryption Key Fail Limit

D-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Table D-4. Ultrium Tape drive sense data - Bytes 12 and 13 (continued)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ Description
2A 13 Encryption - Data Encryption Key Instance Counter Changed
74 00 Security Error
74 01 Encryption - Unable to Decrypt Data
74 02 Encryption - Unencrypted Data Encountered While Decrypting
74 03 Encryption - Incorrect Data Encryption Key
74 04 Encryption - Cryptographic Integrity Validation Failed
74 05 Encryption - Error Decrypting Data

The descriptions below serve only as an overview of sense reporting in the tape
drive. This tape drive conforms to all sense field reporting as specified in the SCSI
standards.
Notes:
1. The Error Code field (Byte 0) is set to 70h to indicate a current error, that is
one associated with the most recently received command. It is set to 71h to
indicate a deferred error which is not associated with the current command.
2. The segment number (Byte 1) is zero since the Copy, Compare, and Copy and
Verify commands are not supported.
3. The File Mark flag (Byte 2, bit 7) is set if a Space, Read, or Verify command
did not complete because a file mark was read.
4. The End of Media (EOM) flag (Byte 2, bit 6) is set if a Write or Write File
Marks command completed in the early warning area. Spacing into BOM also
causes this flag to be set. It is also set on an attempt to read or space past
EOD, or if an attempt is made to space into Beginning of Media.
5. The Illegal Length Indicator (ILI) flag (Byte 2, bit 5) is set if a Read or Verify
ended because a block was read from tape that did not have the block length
requested in the command.
6. The Information Bytes (Bytes 3-5) are only valid if the Valid flag is set. This
occurs only for current errors and not for deferred errors.
7. The Field Replaceable Unit field (Byte 14) is set to either zero or to a non-zero,
vendor-specific code indicating which part of the drive is suspected of causing
the failure.
8. The Clean (CLN) flag (Byte 21, bit 3) is set if the drive needs cleaning and
clear otherwise.
9. The Volume Label Fields Valid (VolValid) bit (Byte 21, bit 0) is set if the
Volume Label being reported is valid.
10. The Volume Label field (Bytes 22-28) reports the volume label if a cartridge is
loaded in the drive and Volume Label Fields Valid is set.
11. The Current Wrap field (Byte 29) reports the physical wrap of the tape. The
least significant bit reflects the current physical direction. A0h means that the
current direction is away from the physical beginning of the tape. A1h means
that the current direction is towards the physical beginning of the tape.
12. Relative LPOS fields (Bytes 30-33) reports the current physical position on the
tape.
13. SCSI Address field (Byte 34) reports the SCSI Bus Address for the drive.
Values returned range from 00h to 0Fh.

Appendix D. Sense Data D-9

 14. This field (Byte 35) contains the frame and drive number, passed across the
RS-422 serial interface.

For additional information, refer to the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive
SCSI Reference.

D-10 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the Host
“Obtaining Error Information From an IBM System p”
“Retrieving from a Sun System” on page E-4
“Retrieving from an HP-UX System” on page E-5
“Retrieving From an IBM System i with RISC Processor” on page E-5

How error information is obtained from the host depends on the type of device
driver being utilized. Table E-1 provides instructions specific to your type of device
driver.
Table E-1. Device driver types
If you are... Then...
Using an IBM device driver Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's
Guide (GC27-2130) for problem determination information
specific to your host operating system. Visit
ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/devdrvr/Doc/ to
download the latest version of the manual.
Using a non-IBM device See “Using the IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)” on
driver page 7-1. Visit http://www-1.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=ssg1S4000662 to download the diagnostic
tool.

Obtaining Error Information From an IBM System p

IBM device drivers for the System p® operating system logs error information
when an error occurs on a tape drive or library.

The error information includes the following:

v Device VPD
v SCSI command parameters
v SCSI sense data (if available)

The AIX Tape and Media Changer Device Driver for System p provides logging to
the system error log for a variety of errors. You can view the error log by following
this procedure.
1. At the AIX command line, type errpt |pg to display a summary report, or type
errpt -a |pg to display a detailed report. Press [Enter].

Note: In most cases you will use the summary report to find the date and time of
any errors related to library devices, then use the detail report to obtain the
sense data needed to identify the cause of the error.
1. Press [Enter] to scroll through the error log.
2. Type q and press [Enter], to quit the error log at any time.

To correct a problem you noticed in the errpt report, determine the type of error by
using the examples that follow:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 E-1

 v For library errors [Resource Name = smcn (for example, smc0) and Resource
Type = 3572-TL]), see “SCSI Sense Data Definition” and the SCSI sense data in
“Library Sense Data” on page D-2.
v For drive errors [Resource Name = rmtn (for example, rmt0) and Resource Type
= LTO], see “SCSI Sense Data Definition” and locate the SCSI sense data in
“Tape Drive Sense Data” on page D-3.

SCSI Sense Data Definition

The following is an example of a tape drive communication failure while attached
to an Open Systems host through a SAS link, using SCSI protocol. When the host
detected the failure, it built the following SCSI Sense Data record. An explanation
of the SCSI Sense Data breakout in this example follows.
SENSE DATA
aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss ssss ssss ssss ssss ....

0600 0000 1200 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0200 0300 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Note: The bold area above represents the SCSI Sense Data presented by the host.
The regular font data (in this case many bytes of “zero”), designated by
“ssss” would normally contain device sense data, but with the kind of
failure in this example (COMMAND TIMEOUT), the host could not collect
valid device sense data, so zeros are the result and should be ignored. If the
host had been able to collect valid sense data from the drive, the first byte
“ss” would be “70”, “71”, “F0” or “F1”, and valid device sense data would
be listed.
Detail Data

aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss ssss ssss ssss ssss ....

aa Length of the Command Descriptor Block (CDB) sent by the host.

In this case, “06” bytes.
bb SCSI target address. In this example, SCSI address “00”.
xx Unused or reserved.
cc Start of CDB, cc is the operation code (byte 0). In this case,
“12” which was an “Inquiry”.

SCSI Sense Data - Library Error

The following example of SCSI Sense Data was received from a System p Open
System host and shows a Tape Drive Failure and what the sense data would look
like. Unlike the previous situation with “SCSI Sense Data Definition,” this data
contains valid sense data as defined by the hex “70” in the first sense byte
position. Therefore, instead of all zeros as in the previous example, we have valid
data to rely on. While the data shows that this is a TAPE_ERR2, it could also be
caused by a library failure. The ASC/ASCQ points to a “Mechanical Positioning
Error” while attempting a “Move Medium” command (“A5”). For more
information about Sense Data, refer to the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive
SCSI Reference.

E-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 LABEL: TAPE_ERR2
IDENTIFIER: 476B351D

Date/Time: Fri May 04 42:26 DFT

Sequence Number: 1665
Machine Id: 0046083B4C00
Node Id: risc4
Class: H
Type: PERM
Resource Name: smc0 Resource Class: tape Resource Type: 3572
Location: P1.1-I3/Q1-W5003013D38321011-L1000000000000
VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......3572-TL
Serial Number...............X2U78B0384
Device Specific.(FW)........4.09 (Firmware Level)

Description
TAPE DRIVE FAILURE

Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE

Failure Causes
TAPE
TAPE DRIVE

Recommended Actions
PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES

Detail Data

aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss ssss ssss ssss ssss ....

aa Length of the Command Descriptor Block (CDB) sent by the host. In this case,
“0C” bytes.
bb SCSI target address. In this example, SCSI address “00”.
xx Unused or reserved.
cc Start of CDB, cc is the operation code (byte 0). In this case, “A5” which
was an “Move Medium”.

SENSE DATA
0C00 0000 A500 0000 100F 1010 0000 0000 0102 0000 7000 0400 0000 000A 0000 0000
818F 0000 BE00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Table E-2. Library sense data example

Hex Description
A5 SCSI Command (in this case Move Medium).
70 Byte 0 of Library Sense Data (Valid Data).
04 Sense Key (in this case Hardware Error).
818F ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/additional sense code
qualifier), in this case a “Cannot Find Slider Block” error.

SCSI Sense Data - Tape Drive Error

The following example of SCSI Sense Data was received from a System p Open
System host and shows a Tape Drive Failure and what the sense data would look
like. Like the SCSI sense data in the previous example, this data contains valid
sense data as defined by the hex “71” in the first sense byte position. Therefore, we
have valid data to rely on. While the data shows that this is a TAPE_ERR2, further
review of the ASC/ASCQ (Media Load or Eject Failed) points more to a problem

Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the Host E-3

 with the media or the drive. The fact that a FID was listed (“86”) defines the
failure as “The drive detected a drive hardware or media fault”. In this case, the
FID should be followed to make a repair. For more information about Sense Key
and ASC/ASCQ fields, refer to the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI
Reference.
LABEL: TAPE_ERR2
IDENTIFIER: 476B351D

Date/Time: Wed May 09 07:51:42 DFT

Sequence Number: 1669
Machine Id: 0046083B4C00
Node Id: risc4
Class: H
Type: PERM
Resource Name: rmt0 Resource Class: tape Resource Type: LTO
Location: P1.1-I3/Q1-W5003013D38321011-L0

VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......ULT3573-TD4
Serial Number...............1300000680
Device Specific.(FW)........74H4 (Firmware Level)
Loadable Microcode Level....A1700D5C

Description
TAPE DRIVE FAILURE

Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE

Failure Causes
TAPE
TAPE DRIVE

Recommended Actions
PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES

Detail Data
SENSE DATA
0600 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0102 0000 7100 0400 0000 0058 0000 0000
5300 8602 8E07 0000 0001 0110 0001 0000 0000 0000 0200 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2800 01E0 0000 0000 0000 4133 3820
2020 2000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 8000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Table E-3. Drive sense data example

Hex Description
71 Byte 0 of Library Sense Data (Valid Data).
04 Sense Key (in this case Hardware Error).
5300 ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/additional sense code qualifier).
86 FID (FRU identification number). In this case, a Drive Hardware or
Media problem.

Retrieving from a Sun System

The Sun system provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or
library in system-errolog /var/adm/messages. When you have located the error
information, go to Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.

E-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Retrieving from an HP-UX System
The HP-UX system provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or
library in syslog /var/adm/syslog.log. When you have located the error
information, go to Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.

Retrieving From an IBM System i with RISC Processor

IBM device drivers for the System i® operating system logs error information when
an error occurs on a tape drive or library.

The error information includes the following:

v Device VPD
v SCSI command parameters
v SCSI sense data (if available)

To gain access to the System i problem logs and error logs, sign on at any available
workstation using the QSRV logon and its security password (QSRV). After signing
on, the proper access authorizations will be granted and the System i MAIN
MENU displays.
1. Type STRSST (Start System Service Tools) command on the command entry line
on the System i Main Menu, and press Enter.
2. On the “System Service Tool (SST)” screen, select Start a service tool, and press
Enter.
3. On the “Start a Service Tool” screen, select Product activity log, and press
Enter.
4. On the “Product activity log” screen, select Analyze log, and press Enter.
5. On the “Select Subsystem Data” screen, select Magnetic media, enter the From
and To time period for searching the error log, and press Enter.
6. On the “Select Analysis Report Options” screen, select the following, and press
Enter.
a. Report type: 1
b. Optional entries to include
1) Informational: YES
2) Statistic: NO
c. Reference code selection
1) Option: 1
2) Reference codes: *ALL
d. Device selection
1) Option: 1
2) Device type or resource names: *ALL
7. On the “Log Analysis Report” screen, enter a 5 on an error line that has a
resource type of 3572, and press Enter.
8. On the “Display Detail Report for Resource” screen, press:
v F4=Additional Information.
Pressing F4 will display the machine type and serial number of the device. It
also will display SCSI sense data, if available.
v F6=Hexadecimal report.
Pressing F6 will display the device hexadecimal data (for support use).

Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the Host E-5

 v F9=Address Information.
Pressing F9 will display the SCSI address information.

E-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix F. Library Configuration Form
Make a copy of this form, fill it out as you are installing and configuring your
library. Update the form each time changes are made to the library. The
information on this form is very important. Having the information on this form
will be helpful if a call to IBM Service is necessary. Store this form in a secure
location.

Physical Library
Machine type 3572-TL
Serial Number
Library Name
Auto Cleaning
Bar code label length

Logical Library
Library Access Mode
Loop
Autoload
Active Slots

Tape Drive
Serial Number
Worldwide Node Name

Network Settings
Ethernet Link Speed
SSL Security
IPv4
DHCP
Static IP Address
Subnet Mask Address
Gateway Address
IPv6
DHCP
Stateless Auto Configuration
Static IP Address
Prefix Length

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 F-1

 Gateway
DNS
DNS IP Address
NTP Date/Time Server
NTP Server IP Address
Time Zone
Auto Adjustment by PC
SMTP (Mail) Server
SMTP Server Address
Sender Address
Subject
Mail to 01
Mail to 02
Mail to 03
Mail to 04
Mail Event Level
SNMP Server
Community
Name
Location
Contact
Trap to 01
Trap to 02
Trap to 03
Trap to 04
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
Trap Event Level

| Encryption Settings (S5H and S4H only)

Encryption License Key
Encryption Method
Encryption Policy
SSL Security
Primary EKM Server IP Address
Primary EKM TCP Port Address
Primary EKM SSL Port Address
Secondary EKM IP Address

F-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 Secondary EKM TCP Port
Address
Secondary EKM SSL Port Address
Advanced Encryption Settings

Library and Drive Firmware

Type of Firmware Current Firmware Level
Library
Drive

Users Accounts
The Administrator (admin) password is listed in the table below. Modify and add
additional Administrator, Superuser, and User names and passwords that are
created.

User name Access Level Password

admin Administrator secure

| Support Notification
User name
Password

Appendix F. Library Configuration Form F-3

F-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Accessibility
Keyboard Accessibility
Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability, such as restricted
mobility or limited vision, to use the HTML version of the customer
documentation successfully.

Features
These are the major accessibility features for the HTML version of the IBM System
Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide:
v You can use screen-reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what
is displayed on the screen. The following screen readers have been tested:
WebKing and Window-Eyes.
v You can operate all features using the keyboard instead of the mouse.

Navigating by keyboard
You can use keys or key combinations to perform operations and initiate many
menu actions that can also be done through mouse actions. You can navigate the
HTML version of the IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator,
and Service Guide help system from the keyboard by using the following key
combinations:
v To traverse to the next link, button, or topic, press Tab inside a frame (page).
v To move to the previous topic node, press ^ or Shift+Tab.
v To scroll all the way up or down, press Home or End, respectively.
v To print the current page or active frame, press Ctrl+P.
v To select, press Enter.

Accessing the publications

You can view the publications for this library in Adobe Portable Document Format
(PDF) using the Adobe Acrobat Reader. The PDFs are provided at the following
Web site:

http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 G-1

G-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries (or regions). Consult your local IBM representative for information
on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an
IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that
IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent
product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property
right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and
verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country (or region) where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states (or regions) do not allow disclaimer
of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement
may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those web
sites. The materials at those web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product and use of those web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of

those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources.
IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of
performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products.
Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 H-1

Trademarks
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in
the United States, or other countries (or regions), or both:

AIX System p
AS/400 System x
IBM System z
iSeries System Storage
i5/OS Tivoli
OS/400 TotalStorage
pSeries ySeries
RS/6000 zSeries
System i

The following are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company, International Business

Machines Corporation, and Certance:
v Linear Tape-Open
v LTO
v Ultrium

Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States, or other

countries (or regions), or both.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000, and the Windows logo are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, or other
countries (or regions), or both.

Solaris and Sun are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Incorporated.

Unix is a trademark of The Open Group in the United States, or other countries or
regions, or both.

Other company, product, or service names may be the trademarks or service marks
of others.

Electronic Emission Notices

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A

Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

H-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive [select either 89/336/EEC as amended by Council Directive 93/68/EEC
or select 2004/108/EC as appropriate] on the approximation of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a
non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM
option cards.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The
limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may

cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

European Community contact:

IBM Technical Regulations
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569
Tele: 0049 (0)711 785 1176
Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283
e-mail: [email protected]

People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission

Statement

Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Notices H-3
 IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact:

IBM Taiwan Corporation

3-4F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: 0800-016-888

Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement

Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.

Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen

Verträglichkeit. Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der
EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU- Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die
Grenzwerte der EN 550022 Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu

installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung für
die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der
IBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

H-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
 EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:
“Warnung: dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im
Wohnbereich Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber
verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür
aufzukommen.”

Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische

Verträglichkeit von Geräten. Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG)”. Dies is die Umsetzung
der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die

elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG
Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A.

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen.

Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung des EMVG ist die IBM Deutschland
GmbH 70548 Stuttgart.

Generelle Informationen:

Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A.

Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Notices H-5
H-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Glossary
This glossary defines the special terms, AME. Application Managed Encryption.
abbreviations, and acronyms that are used in this
ampere (A). A unit of measure for electric current that
publication. If you do not find the term you are
is equivalent to a flow of one coulomb per second, or
looking for, refer to the index or to the Dictionary
to the current produced by one volt applied across a
of Computing, 1994. resistance of one ohm.

Numerics ANSI. American National Standards Institute.

application-managed encryption. Tape encryption

2:1 compression. The relationship between the
controlled by an application.
quantity of data that can be stored with compression as
compared to the quantity of data that can be stored archive. To collect and store files in a designated
without compression. In 2:1 compression, twice as place.
much data can be stored with compression as can be
stored without compression. ASCII. American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange. A 7 bit coded character set (8
A bits including parity check) that consists of control
characters and graphic characters.
A. Ampere. assigning a device. The establishing of the
relationship of a device to a running task, process, job,
ac. Alternating current.
or program.
access method. A technique for moving data between
assignment. The naming of a specific device to
main storage and input or output devices.
perform a function.
accessor. This component contains the library robot
asynchronous. Pertaining to two or more processes
and bar code reader. The accessor moves cartridges to
that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific
and from the I/O Station, storage slots, and tape
events such as common timing signals.
drives.
attention (notice). A word for calling attention to the
adapter card. A circuit board that adds function to a
possibility of danger to a program, device, or system,
computer.
or to data. Contrast with caution and danger.
adj. Adjustment.
ATTN. Attention.
AH. Authentication Header. This is an Internet
Protocol intended to guarantee connectionless integrity B
and data origin authentication of IP datagrams. Further,
it can optionally protect against replay attacks by using backup. To make additional copies of documents or
the sliding window technique and discarding old software for safekeeping.
packets.
bar code. A code representing characters by sets of
AIX. Advanced Interactive Executive. IBM’s parallel bars of varying thickness and separation which
implementation of the UNIX® operating system. The are read optically by transverse scanning.
RS/6000® system, among others, uses AIX as it’s
operating system. bar code label. Paper bearing a bar code and having
an adhesive backing. The bar code label must be
alphanumeric. Pertaining to a character set that affixed to a tape cartridge to enable the library to
contains letters, numerals, and usually other characters, identify the cartridge and its volume serial number.
such as punctuation marks.
bar code reader. A laser device specialized for
alter. To change. scanning and reading bar codes and converting them
into either the ASCII or EBCDIC digital character code.
ambient temperature. The temperature of air or other
media in a designated area, particularly the area bezel. Decorative and safety cover.
surrounding equipment.
bicolored. Having two colors.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 I-1

bit. Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary char. Character.
numbering system.
CHK. Check.
BOM or bill of materials. A list of specific types and
amounts of direct materials expected to be used to cleaning cartridge. A tape cartridge that is used to
produce a given job or quantity of output. clean the heads of a tape drive. Contrast with data
cartridge.
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). BGP is the core
routing protocol of the Internet. It works by command. A control signal that initiates an action or
maintaining a table of IP networks or 'prefixes' that the start of a sequence of actions.
designate network reachability among autonomous
systems (AS). compact disc (CD). A disc, usually 4.75 inches in
diameter, from which data is read optically by means of
browser. A client program that initiates requests to a a laser.
Web server and displays the information that the server
returns. compression. The process of eliminating gaps, empty
fields, redundancies, and unnecessary data to shorten
buffer. A routine or storage used to compensate for a the length of records or blocks.
difference in rate of flow of data or time of occurrence
of events, when transferring data from one device to concurrent. Refers to diagnostic procedures that can
another. be run on one control unit while the rest of the
subsystem remains available for customer applications.
bus. A facility for transferring data between several
devices located between two end points, only one contingent connection. A connection between a
device being able to transmit at a given moment. channel path and a drive caused when a unit check
occurs during an I/O operation.
byte. A string consisting of a certain number of bits
(usually 8) that are treated as a unit and represent a controller. A device that provides the interface
character. A fundamental data unit. between a system and one or more tape drives.

control path drive. A drive that communicates

C messages from the host computer to the library in
which the drive is installed.
CA certification. In cryptography, a certificate from a
Certificate Authority (CA). cookie. A packet of data exchanged between the
library and a web browser to track configuration.
capacity. The amount of data that can be contained on
storage media and expressed in bytes of data. CP. Circuit protector.

cartridge manual rewind tool. A device that can be CRU. Customer replaceable unit.
fitted into the reel of a cartridge and used to rewind
ctrl. Control.
tape into or out of the cartridge.
CU. Control unit.
cartridge memory (CM). Within each data cartridge,
an embedded electronics and interface module that can
store and retrieve a cartridge's historical usage and D
other information.
danger (notice). A word to call attention to possible
cartridge storage slot. Individual slot located within a lethal harm to people. Contrast with attention and
magazine that is used to house tape cartridges. caution.
caution (notice). A word to call attention to possible data. Any representations such as characters or analog
personal harm to people. Contrast with attention and quantities to which meaning is or might be assigned.
danger.
data buffer. The storage buffer in the control unit.
CE. Customer engineer; field engineer; service This buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate
representative. between the control unit and the channel.
centimeter (cm). One one-hundredth of a meter (0.01 data cartridge. A tape cartridge dedicated to storing
m). Approximately 0.39 inch. data. Contrast with cleaning cartridge.
channel command. An instruction that directs a data data check. A synchronous or asynchronous indication
channel, control unit, or device to perform an operation of a condition caused by invalid data or incorrect
or set of operations. positioning of data.

I-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
dc. Direct current. computer. (2) To transfer data from a computer to a
connected device, such as a workstation or
DCS. Designated Cleaning Slot microcomputer.

degauss. To make a magnetic tape nonmagnetic by DRAM. Dynamic random-access memory.

means of electrical coils carrying currents that
neutralize the magnetism of the tape. drive, magnetic tape. A mechanism for moving
magnetic tape and controlling its movement.
degausser. A device that makes magnetic tape
nonmagnetic. Drive Not Configured. This message occurs during
the first boot after a factory settings restore is executed.
degradation. A decrease in quality of output or This is not a real issue since it takes the library a while
throughput or an increase in machine error rate. to configure.

degraded. Decreased in quality of output or DRV. Drive.

throughput or increased machine error rate.
DSA key. Encryption key type.
deserialize. To change from serial-by-bit to
parallel-by-byte. DSE. Data security erase.

detented. A part being held in position with a catch or DSP. Digital signal processor.
lever.

device. Any hardware component or peripheral, such E

as a tape drive or tape library, that can receive and
send data. EBCDIC. Extended binary-coded decimal interchange
code.
device driver. A file that contains the code needed to
use an attached device. EC. Edge connector. Engineering change.

DHCPv6. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ECC. Error correction code.
for IPv6. Although IPv6's stateless address
EEPROM. Electrically erasable programmable
autoconfiguration removes the primary motivation for
read-only memory.
DHCP in IPv4, DHCPv6 can still be used to statefully
assign addresses if the network administrator desires EIA. Electronics Industries Association.
more control over addressing.
EIA unit. A unit of measure, established by the
DH group. Diffie-Hellman group. Electronic Industries Association, equal to 44.45
millimeters (1.75 inches).
DIAG. Diagnostic section of maintenance information
manual. eject. To remove or force out from within.
differential. See High Voltage Differential (HVD). EKM. See encryption key manager.
direct access storage. A storage device in which the electronic mail. Correspondence in the form of
access time is independent of the location of the data. messages transmitted between user terminals over a
computer network.
display contrast. The brightness of the display on the
Operator Panel. e-mail. See electronic mail.
DLL. Dynamic Link Library. Microsoft's encryption. A method of storing data in a format that
implementation of the shared library concept. These helps protect data from inadvertent or deliberate
libraries usually have the file extension dll, ocs (for compromise. An encryption-enabled drive contains the
libraries containing activeX controls, or drv (for legacy necessary hardware and firmware to encrypt and
system drivers). decrypt host tape application data. Encryption policy
and encryption keys are provided by the host
DNS. Directory Name System. This allows the library
application or host server.
to recognize text-based addresses instead of numeric IP
addresses. encryption key manager (EKM). A Java software
program that assists IBM-encrypting tape drives in
download. (1) To transfer programs or data from a
generating, protecting, storing, and maintaining
computer to a connected device, typically a personal
encryption keys that encrypt information written to and
decrypt information read from tape media.

Glossary I-3
entitlement. IBM entitlement is the official right to Input/Output System (BIOS) in read-only memory
receive service and support for your tape library. (ROM) on a PC motherboard.

EPO. Emergency power off. FLASH EEPROM. An electrically erasable

programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) that can
EPROM. Erasable programmable read only memory. be updated.

EQC. Equipment check. FMR. Field microcode replacement.

equipment check. An asynchronous indication of a format. The arrangement or layout of data on a data
malfunction. medium.

Error log. A dataset or file in a product or system formatter. Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that
where error information is stored for later access. performs data conversion, speed matching, encoding,
first level error recovery, and interfaces to one or more
ESD. Electrostatic discharge. tape drives.
ESP. Encapsulating Security Payload. This is an FP. File protect.
Internet Protocol that provides origin authenticity,
integrity, and confidentiality protection of a packet. ESP frayed. Damaged as if by an abrasive substance.
also supports encryption-only and authentication-only
configurations, but using encryption without FRU. Field replaceable unit.
authentication is strongly discouraged because it is
insecure. FSC. Fault symptom code.

FSI. Fault symptom index.

F
FTSS. Field Technical Sales Support.
fault symptom code (FSC). A hexadecimal code
generated by the drive or the control unit microcode in functional microcode. Microcode that is resident in
response to a detected subsystem error. the machine during normal customer operation.

FC. Feature code.

G
FCC. Federal communications commission.
g. Gram.
FE. Field engineer, customer engineer, or service
representative. GB. gigabyte.

fiducial. A target used for teaching a physical location GBIC. Gigabit Interface Converter.
to a robot.
Gbs. gigabits/second
field replaceable unit (FRU). An assembly that is
gigabit (Gbit). 1 000 000 000 bits.
replaced in its entirety when any one of its components
fails. gigabyte (GB). 1 000 000 000 bytes.
file. A named set of records stored or processed as a Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC). Converts copper
unit. Also referred to as a dataset. interface to optic interface.
file protection. The processes and procedures gnd. Ground.
established in an information system that are designed
to inhibit unauthorized access to, contamination of, or
deletion of a file. H
file transfer protocol (FTP). In the Internet suite of HD Slot Technology. High-density (HD) slot
protocols, an application layer protocol that uses TCP technology. Allows multiple cartridges to be stored in a
and Telnet services to transfer bulk-data files between tiered architecture.
machines or hosts.
hertz (Hz). Unit of frequency. One hertz equals one
firmware. Proprietary code that is usually delivered as cycle per second.
microcode as part of an operating system. Firmware is
more efficient than software loaded from an alterable hex. Hexadecimal.
medium and more adaptable to change than pure
hardware circuitry. An example of firmware is the Basic High Voltage Differential (HVD). A logic signaling
system that enables data communication between a

I-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
supported host and the library. HVD signaling uses a INTRO. Introduction.
paired plus and minus signal level to reduce the effects
of noise on the SCSI bus. Any noise injected into the I/O. Input/output.
signal is present in both a plus and minus state, and is
thereby canceled. Synonymous with differential. I/O Station. Cartridge location dedicated for the
insertion of cartridges into and the removal of
HVD. SCSI Bus High Voltage Differential cartridges from the library.

Hz. Hertz (cycles per second). IOP. Input/output processor.

IP. Internet protocol.

I
IP address. An identifier for a computer or device on
IBM Ultrium Tape Drive. Located within the library, a TCP/IP network. Networks using the TCP/IP
a data-storage device that controls the movement of the protocol route messages based on the IP address of the
magnetic tape in an IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge. destination. See IPv4 and IPv6.
The drive houses the mechanism (drive head) that
reads and writes data to the tape. IPL. Initial program load.

ID. Identifier. IPsec (IP security). A set of protocols for securing

IPv6 network communications by authentication and
identifier (ID). (1) In programming languages, a encryption.
lexical unit that names a language object; for example,
the names of variables, arrays, records, labels, or IP Stack. A TCP/IP protocol stack that manages static
procedures. An identifier usually consists of a letter IP addresses.
optionally followed by letters, digits, or other
IPv4. A network layer protocol for packet-switched
characters. (2) One or more characters used to identify
networks. IPv4 supports 232 (about 4.3 billion)
or name data element and possibly to indicate certain
addresses.
properties of that data element. (3) A sequence of bits
or characters that identifies a program, device, or IPv6. A network layer protocol for packet-switched
system to another program, device, or system. networks. It is the designated successor of IPv4 for
general use on the Internet. The main improvement
IKE. Internet Key Exchange used in the IPsec protocol.
brought by IPv6 is the increase in the number of
IML. Initial microprogram load. addresses available for networked devices, allowing, for
example, each mobile phone and mobile electronic
incompatible magazine. This message may appear on device to have its own unique address.
the Operator Panel during library initialization. It
occurs during factory restore or VPD. This is not a real ISV. Independent Software Vendor.
issue since it takes the library a while to configure.
ITDT. IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool.
initial microprogram load (IML). The action of
ITST. Idle-time self-test.
loading a microprogram from an external storage to
writable control storage.
K
initiator. The component that executes a command.
The initiator can be the host system or the tape control kilogram (kg). One thousand grams (approximately
unit. 2.2 pounds).
INST. Installation. km. kilometer. 1000 Meters, Approximately 5/8 mile.
interface. A shared boundary. An interface might be a
hardware component to link two devices or it might be L
a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or
more computer programs. LAN. Local area network. A computer network within
a limited area.
Internet Protocol Version 4 (IPv4). See IPv4.
LCD. See liquid crystal display.
Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6). See IPv6.
LDAP. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. This
interposer. The part used to convert a 68-pin allows the library to use login and password
connector to a 50-pin D-shell connector. information stored on a server to grant access to the
library functionality.
intervention required. Manual action is needed.

Glossary I-5
LDI. Library Drive Interface. Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU). The size of the
largest packet that a network protocol can transmit.
LED. Light-emitting diode.
MB. Mega Byte (usually expressed as data rate in
library certification. In cryptography, a certificate MB/s or MB/second).
provided by the library.
media capacity. The amount of data that can be
library-managed encryption. Tape encryption contained on a storage medium, expressed in bytes of
controlled by the tape library. data.

library recovery. Library firmware function that media-type identifier. Part of the bar code on an IBM
generally retries failed operations up to three times Ultrium Tape Cartridge that identifies the type of
before posting a failure or, in some situations, cartridge (for example “L1”). “L” identifies cartridges
proceeding with an operation that can be completed in that can be read by devices that incorporate LTO
an alternative manner. technology. The numeral indicates the generation of the
type.
Linear Tape-Open (LTO). A type of tape storage
technology developed by the IBM Corporation, mega. One million of.
Hewlett-Packard, and Certance. LTO is an “open
format” technology, which means that its users will meter. In the Metric System, the basic unit of length;
have multiple sources of product and media. The equal to approximately 39.37 inches.
“open” nature of LTO technology enables compatibility
between different vendors' offerings by ensuring that MIB. Management Information Base. Information
vendors comply with verification standards. The LTO repository used by SNMP.
technology is implemented in two formats: the Accelis
format focuses on fast access; the Ultrium format micro. One millionth of.
focuses on high capacity. The Ultrium format is the
microcode. (1) One or more micro instructions. (2) A
preferred format when capacity is the key storage
code, representing the instructions of an instruction set,
consideration. Ultrium tape cartridges have a capacity
implemented in a part of storage that is not
of up to 800 GB (1600 GB with 2:1 hardware
program-addressable. (3) To design, write, and test one
compression).
or more micro instructions. (4) See also microprogram.
liquid crystal display (LCD). A low-power display
microdiagnostic routine. A program that runs under
technology used in computers and other I/O devices.
the control of a supervisor, usually to identify field
loadable. Having the ability to be loaded. replaceable units.

LME. Library Managed Encryption. microdiagnostic utility. A program that is run by the
customer engineer to test the machine.
LTO. See Linear Tape-Open.
microinstruction. A basic or elementary machine
LVD. SCSI Bus Low Voltage Differential. instruction.

microprogram. A group of microinstructions that

M when executed performs a preplanned function. The
term microprogram represents a dynamic arrangement
MAC address. The Media Access Control address of a or selection of one or more groups of microinstructions
computer networking device. for execution to perform a particular function. The term
microcode represents microinstructions used in a
magnetic tape. A tape with a magnetic surface layer product as an alternative to hard-wired circuitry to
on which data can be stored by magnetic recording. implement certain functions of a processor or other
system component.
MAP. Maintenance analysis procedure.
MIM. Media information message.
mask. A pattern of characters that controls the
retention or elimination of portions of another pattern mm. Millimeter.
of characters. To use a pattern of characters to control
the retention or elimination of portions of another modifier. That which changes the meaning.
pattern of characters.
mount a device. To assign an I/O device with a
master file. A file used as an authority in a given job request to the operator.
and that is relatively permanent, even though its
contents may change. Synonymous with main file. MP. Microprocessor.

I-6 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
ms. Millisecond. PCC. Power control compartment.

MSG. Message. PDF. Portable Document Format.

multipath. Pertaining to using more than one path. PE. Parity error. Product engineer.

PFS. Perfect forward secrecy.

N
pick. Pertaining to the library, to remove, by means of
N/A. Not applicable. a robotic device, a tape cartridge from a storage slot or
drive.
Network Address Translation (NAT). NAT involves
rewriting the source and/or destination addresses of IP picker. A robotic mechanism located inside the library
packets as they pass through a router or firewall. Most that moves cartridges between the cartridge storage
systems using NAT do so in order to enable multiple slots and the drive. See accessor.
hosts on a private network to access the Internet using
a single public IP address. PM. Preventive maintenance.

node. In a network, a point at which one or more POR. Power-on reset.

functional units connect channels or data circuits.
port. A physical connection for communication
NTP. Network Time Protocol. This allows the library between the 3590 and the host processor. The 3590 has
to set its internal date and time based on the date and two SCSI ports.
time of a sever.
Portable Document Format (PDF). A standard
NVS. Nonvolatile storage. A storage device whose specified by Adobe Systems, Incorporated, for the
contents are not lost when power is cut off. electronic distribution of documents. PDF files are
compact, can be distributed globally (via e-mail, the
Web, intranets, or CD-ROM), and can be viewed with
O the Acrobat Reader, which is software from Adobe
Systems that can be downloaded at no cost from the
oersted. The unit of magnetic field strength in the Adobe Systems home page.
centimeter-gram-second (cgs) electromagnetic system.
The oersted is the magnetic field strength in the interior Private key. A cryptographic key used to decrypt a
of an elongated, uniformly wound solenoid that is message.
excited with a linear current density in its winding of
one abampere per 4π centimeters of axial length. PROM. Programmable read only memory.

offline. Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit PS. Power supply.

without the continual control of a computer. Contrast
with online. PTF. Program temporary fix. A single bugfix or group
of bugfixes distributed in a form ready to install for
online. Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit customers.
that is under the continual control of a computer.
Contrast with offline. PWR. Power.

OPER. Operation.
R
ov. Over voltage.
rack. A unit that houses the components of a storage
overrun. Loss of data because a receiving device is subsystem, such as the library.
unable to accept data at the rate it is transmitted.
rackmount kit. A packaged collection of articles used
overtightening. To tighten too much. to install the rack mounted version of the library.

RAM. Random access memory.

P
Random access memory. A storage device into which
parameter. A variable that is given a constant value data is entered and from which data is retrieved in a
for a specified application and that may denote the nonsequential manner.
application.
RAS. Reliability, availability, and serviceability.
p bit. Parity bit.
record. A collection of related data or words, treated
PC. Parity check. as a unit.

Glossary I-7
recording density. The number of bits in a single simultaneously with thinner and longer cables. It
linear track measured per unit of length of the supports full-duplex signal transmission up to 3 Gb/s.
recording medium. In addition, SAS drives can be hot-plugged.

recoverable error. An error condition that allows serialize. To change from parallel-by-byte to
continued execution of a program. serial-by-bit.

ref. Reference. serializer. A device that converts a space distribution

of simultaneous states representing data into a
reg. Register. corresponding time sequence of states.

reinventory. To inventory again. servo, servos. An adjective for use in qualifying some
part or aspect of a servomechanism.
retension. The process or function of tightening the
tape onto the cartridge, if it is sensed that the tape has servomechanism. A feedback control system in which
a loose wrap on the cartridge. at least one of the system signals represents mechanical
motion.
RFC (Request for Comments). Request for Comments
(RFC) documents are a series of memoranda signature. A digital signature used in cryptography to
encompassing new research, innovations, and identify one party to ensure authenticity.
methodologies applicable to Internet technologies.
slot blocker. A slot blocker is used to restrict/close off
RH. Relative humidity. a data cell so a data cartridge cannot be inserted.

RML. Rack Mount Line. Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI). A

standard used by computer manufacturers for attaching
robot. Accessor. peripheral devices (such as tape drives, hard disks,
CD-ROM players, printers, and scanners) to computers
robotics. Accessor assembly.
(servers). Pronounced “scuzzy”. Variations of the SCSI
root CA certification. In cryptography, a root interface provide for faster data transmission rates than
certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA). standard serial and parallel ports (up to 160 megabytes
per second). The variations include:
RPQ. Request for price quotation. v Fast/Wide SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus, and supports data
rates of up to 20 MBps.
RSA key. Encryption key type.
v SCSI-1: Uses an 8-bit bus, and supports data rates of
R/W. Read/write. 4 MBps.
v SCSI-2: Same as SCSI-1, but uses a 50-pin connector
S instead of a 25-pin connector, and supports multiple
devices.
s. Seconds of time. v Ultra SCSI: Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus, and supports
data rates of 20 or 40 MBps.
SAC. Service Action Code. Code developed to indicate v Ultra2 SCSI: Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus and supports
possible FRU or FRUs to replace to repair the data rates of 40 or 80 MBps.
hardware.
v Ultra3 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data
SAS. See Serial Attached SCSI. rates of 80 or 160 MBps.
v Ultra160 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data
scratch cartridge. A data cartridge that contains no rates of 80 or 160 MBps.
useful data, but can be written to with new data.
SME. System Managed Encryption.
SCSI. Small computer system interface.
SNMP. Simple Network Management Protocol. Used
SE. Single-ended. by network management systems to monitor
network-attached devices.
segment. A part.
SNS. Sense.
sel. Select.
SNTP. Simple Network Time Protocol. Used to
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS). A drive with a SAS synchronize the clocks of network-attached devices.
interface can be linked directly to controllers. SAS is a
performance improvement over traditional SCSI
because SAS enables multiple devices (up to 128) of
different sizes and types to be connected

I-8 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
special feature. A feature that can be ordered to transport mode. End-to-end communications security
enhance the capability, storage capacity, or performance in which the end-point computers do the security
of a product, but is not essential for its basic work. processing.

SPI. Security Parameters Index. trusted certification. In cryptography, a trustworthy

certificate not registered with a Certificate Authority.
SR. Service representative, see also CE.
tunnel mode. Port-to-port communications security in
SRAM. Static random access memory. which security is provided to several machines by a
single node.
SS. Status store.

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer). A set of cryptographic U

protocols for secure communications on the Internet for
such things as web browsing, e-mail, Internet faxing, UART. Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter.
instant messaging, and other data transfer. SSL allows
applications to communicate across a network in a way unload. Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from
designed to prevent eavesdropping, tampering, and the drive.
message forgery.
utilities. Utility programs.
ST. Store.
utility programs. A computer program in general
standard feature. The significant design elements of a support of the processes of a computer; for instance, a
product that are included as part of the fundamental diagnostic program.
product.
uv. Under voltage.
START. Start maintenance.

subsystem. A secondary or subordinate system, V

usually capable of operating independently of, or
asynchronously with, a controlling system. VOLSER. Volume serial number.

SUPP. Support. volume. A certain portion of data, together with its

data carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a unit.
sync. Synchronous, synchronize. Occurring with a
regular or predictable time relationship. VPD. Vital product data. The information contained
within the tape drive that requires nonvolatile storage
system-managed encryption. Tape encryption is set used by functional areas of the drive, and information
up implicitly through the IBM device driver. required for manufacturing, RAS, and engineering.

T W
tachometer, tach. A device that emits pulses that are word. A character string that is convenient for some
used to measure/check speed or distance. purpose to consider as an entity.

tape cartridge. A container holding magnetic tape that World Wide Node Name (WWNN). A unique
can be processed without separating it from the character string identifying Fiber Channel Host Bus
container. Adapters (HBA)

tape void. An area in the tape in which no signal can Write. Write command.
be detected.
WT. world trade.
TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol. X
TCU. Tape control unit.
XR. External register.
TH. Thermal.
XRA. External register address register.
thread/load operation. A procedure that places tape
along the tape path.

TM. Tapemark.

Glossary I-9
I-10 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Index
A changing passwords
Operator Panel 4-12
depth of library 1-10
deskside cover 3-2
about this document xxi Web User Interface 4-21 desktop mounting
access mode, library configuration 3-19 channel calibration 1-8 installation 3-2
Accessor A-9 Clean Drive LED 2-1 device drivers, supported 1-12
viewing statistics 4-38 cleaning cartridge 5-4 DHCP 3-22
Accessor locking screw 1-5 cleaning cartridges 1-9 Operator Panel 4-11
removing 3-12 cleaning drives diagnosing problems 6-3
account types, Web User Interface 2-6, Operator Panel 4-6 diagnostics
A-2 Web User Interface 4-20 Operator Panel 4-13, 4-14
active slots clock, Operator Panel 2-1 verifying library 3-35
configuration 3-20, 3-32 configuration 3-15 dimensions of library 1-10
Operator Panel 4-9 active slots 3-20, 3-32 DNS server IP address
Web User Interface 4-23 application managed encryption 3-25 configuration 3-22
application managed encryption auto cleaning 3-21, 3-33 drive diagnostics
configuration 3-25 cartridge assignment 3-21 head test 4-14
Web User Interface 4-26 date settings 3-22, 3-33, 4-28 media test 4-14
Attention LED 2-1 default settings 3-15 normal R/W test 4-14
auto cleaning DNS server IP address 3-22 Operator Panel 4-14
configuration 3-21, 3-33 encryption 3-24 performance R/W test 4-14
Operator Panel 4-8 encryption key manager 3-25, 3-26 SAS wrap test 4-15
Web User Interface 4-22 encryption policy 3-26 drive logs, downloading 4-35
autoload ethernet port 3-13
configuration 3-20, 3-33 gateway 3-22
I/O Station 3-20, 3-32
IP address 3-22
E
B IPv4 address 3-22
e-mail notifications
configuration 3-26
back light IPv6 address 3-22
Web User Interface 4-28
Operator Panel 4-12 library access mode 3-19
e-mailing logs 6-11
bar code labels 5-5, 6-3 library configuration form F-1
electrical specifications 1-10
ordering 5-22 library managed encryption 3-25
encryption 1-6
bar code reader 1-5 library settings 3-32
configuration 3-24
link speed (ethernet) 3-22
key manager configuration 3-25
network settings 3-22, 3-31
policy configuration 3-26
C notification settings, e-mail 3-26
notification settings, SNMP 3-27
encryption key manager
cables configuration 3-25, 3-26
NTP server 3-23, 4-28
reseating 6-11 Encryption Key Manager (EKM) 3-25
random access mode 3-20, 3-33
capacity scaling 5-3 encryption policy
saving/restoring 3-30, 4-30
cartridge assignment Web User Interface 4-27
sequential access mode 3-20, 3-33
configuration 3-21 encryption settings
subnet mask 3-22
cartridge magazine 1-2, 1-4, A-9 Web User Interface 4-25
sytem managed encryption 3-25
cartridge magazines environmental specifications 1-10
tape drives 3-21
emergency release 1-4 error codes B-1
TCP/IP 3-22
removing during installation 8-1 library B-1
time server 3-23, 4-28
unlocking 4-5 tape drives B-11
time settings 3-22, 3-33, 4-28
cartridge memory 5-5 Error LED 2-1
user accounts 3-29
cartridges 5-3 error logs 6-2
viewing settings 4-3
care and handling 5-8 e-mailing 6-11
Web User Interface 3-17
cleaning 1-9, 5-4 error messages 6-2
control keys 1-2
compatibility 5-3 Web User Interface B-11
current information
data 1-9, 5-2 error messages and resolutions 6-2
Operator Panel 4-3
disposing 5-18 error status
moving 4-5 Operator Panel 4-13
ordering 5-19 ethernet port 1-5, 3-13
packaging 5-8 D
repairing 5-11 data cartridges 1-9, 5-2
shipping 5-18 date settings 3-22, 4-28
configuration 3-33
F
WORM 5-3 firmware
write-protect switch 5-7 Operator Panel 4-10
updating 4-36
CE log, dumping 4-36 default settings
updating using ITDT 7-1
Operator Panel 4-12

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008, 2011 X-1

foot pads, attaching 3-2 IPv4 address Logical Unit Number (LUN)
frequency, electrical supply 1-10 configuration 3-22 scanning 1-9
front panel IPv6 address login
cartridge magazine 1-2 configuration 3-22 Web User Interface 2-5, 3-17, A-1
control keys 1-2 IPv6 prefix length logs
LCD display 1-2 Web User Interface 3-22 e-mailing 6-11
LEDs 6-10 ITDT firmware update tool 7-1 looping
Operator Panel 1-2 configuration 3-20
serial number label 1-2 looping access mode
L configuration 3-33
LUN (logical unit number) scanning 1-9
LCD contrast
G Operator Panel 4-12
gateway LEDs
configuration 3-22 front panel 6-10 M
Operator Panel 4-11 interpreting 6-10 maintenance
Web User Interface 3-22 library procedures 8-1
attaching RID tag 8-18 required tools 8-1
configuration form F-1 media 1-9, 5-1
H connecting network cable 3-13
connecting power cord 3-14
cleaning cartridges 1-9
data cartridges 1-9
hardware attributes, viewing 4-4
connecting to host interface diagnostics 4-14
head test drive diagnostics 4-14
cable 3-13 ordering 5-19
height of library 1-10
diagnosing problems 6-3 menus 4-1
host
downloading drive logs 4-35 Operator Panel 4-2
retrieving messages E-1
downloading library logs 4-36 Web User Interface 2-6, 4-15, A-3
SAS interface 1-5
error codes B-1 messages, retrieval at the host E-1
Host Bus Adapter (HBA) 1-9
installation location 3-2 mounting location, library 3-2
host interface cable
logging out 4-8 moving cartridges
connecting 3-13
moving from rack to desktop 8-2 Operator Panel 4-5
parts list 9-1 Web User Interface 4-19
powering down 4-7
I preparing to ship 4-7
I/O Station
configuration 3-20, 3-32
problem reporting 6-1
rebooting 4-8
N
network cable
Web User Interface 4-22, 4-23 replacing chassis 8-15
connecting 3-13
IBM Technical Support sense data D-2
network settings
contacting 7-2 TapeAlert flags C-1
configuration 3-22, 3-31
installation troubleshooting 6-1
ethernet port 1-5
cartridge magazines 8-1 viewing logs 4-33
Operator Panel 4-11
connecting network cable 3-13 viewing trace data 4-35
Web User Interface 4-24
connecting power cord 3-14 library access mode
Network Time Protocol (NTP) 1-8
connecting to host interface configuration 3-19
normal R/W test drive diagnostics 4-14
cable 3-13 library control board A-9
notification settings
desktop mounting kit 3-2 library logs, downloading 4-36
e-mail 3-26
foot pads 3-2 library managed encryption
SNMP 3-27
library in rack 3-7 configuration 3-25
Web User Interface 4-28, 4-29
location 3-2 Web User Interface 4-26
NTP 1-8
location in rack 3-7 library map 4-17
NTP address 3-23, 4-28
product environment 1-11 library mode
NTP server
rack brackets 8-5, 8-8 Operator Panel 4-9
configuration 3-23, 4-28
rack mounting 3-5 library settings
Operator Panel 4-11
rack mounting rails 3-9, 8-10 configuration 3-32
removing Accessor locking Operator Panel 4-9
screw 3-12 Web User Interface 4-22
verifying library, diagnostics 3-35 library state O
interior components Web User Interface 4-20 offline/online icon, Operator Panel 2-1
accessor A-9 library verify diagnostics 3-35 online/offline
cartridge magazine A-9 Operator Panel 4-13 Operator Panel 4-7
library control board A-9 link speed Web User Interface 4-20
power supply A-9 configuration 3-22 operating procedures 4-1
tape drive A-9 Web User Interface 4-24 operating systems, supported 1-12
inventory link speed (ethernet) operational specifications 1-11
Operator Panel 4-6 Operator Panel 4-11 operator interventions
Web User Interface 4-21 logging out servicing library 4-33
IP address Operator Panel 4-8 Operator Panel 1-2, 2-1
configuration 3-22 logical library 4-23 active slots 4-9
Operator Panel 4-11 auto cleaning 4-8

X-2 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Operator Panel (continued) product environment 1-11 specifications
back light 4-12 electrical 1-10
changing passwords 4-12 environmental 1-10
cleaning drives 4-6
current information 4-3
R operational 1-11
physical 1-10
rack mounting 3-7
date settings 4-10 speed matching 1-8
installation 3-5
default settings 4-12 SSL 3-22
installing rails 3-9, 8-10
DHCP 4-11 storage capacity 1-11
location in rack 3-7
diagnostics 4-13, 4-14 subnet mask
rack brackets 8-5, 8-8
drive diagnostics 4-14 configuration 3-22
random access mode
error status 4-13 Operator Panel 4-11
configuration 3-20, 3-33
gateway 4-11 Support Notification registration 3-36
Operator Panel 4-9
inventory 4-6 system managed encryption
Ready/Activity LED 2-1
IP address 4-11 configuration 3-25
rear panel
IPv4 settings 4-12 Web User Interface 4-26
Accessor locking screw 1-5
IPv6 prefix length 4-12 system summary
ethernet port 1-5
IPv6 settings 4-12 Web User Interface 4-16
power button 1-5
LCD contrast 4-12
power connector 1-5
library mode 4-9
SAS host interface 1-5
library settings 4-9
library verify diagnostics 4-13
rebooting T
Operator Panel 4-8 tape drive A-9
link speed (ethernet) 4-11
reporting library problems 6-1 channel calibration 1-8
logging out 4-8
reseating cables 6-11 power management 1-8
moving cartridges 4-5
resetting drive speed matching 1-8
network settings 3-31, 4-11
Web User Interface 4-36 tape drives
offline/online icon 2-1
retrieving messages at the host E-1 cleaning 4-6
online/offline 4-7
revision configuration 3-21
operating procedures 4-1
Operator Panel 4-4 diagnostics 4-14
panel settings 4-12
RID tag, attaching to library 8-18 downloading drive logs 4-35
preparing to ship 4-7
error codes B-11
random access mode 4-9
sense data D-3
rebooting 4-8
revision 4-4 S TapeAlert flags C-3
unloading 4-6
sequential access mode 4-9 SAS host interface 1-5, 1-6
TapeAlert flags C-1
service mode 4-13 SAS interface 3-13
library C-1
SNTP server 4-11 SAS wrap test drive diagnostics 4-15
tape drives C-3
sound 4-12 saving/restoring configuration
TCP/IP configuration 3-22, 4-24
Stateless DHCP 4-12 Web User Interface 4-30
Telnet Service Port A-4
subnet mask 4-11 SCSI sense data E-2
time server
time settings 4-10 sense data
address 3-23, 4-28
top menu 4-2 key definitions D-1
configuration 3-23, 4-28
unloading drives 4-6 library D-2
time settings 3-22, 4-28
unlocking I/O Station 4-4 tape drives D-3
configuration 3-22, 3-33, 4-28
unlocking magazines 4-5 sense data, definition E-2
Operator Panel 4-10
viewing settings 4-3 sequential access mode
tools, required 8-1
configuration 3-20, 3-33
trace data, viewing 4-35
Operator Panel 4-9
trap notifications
P serial attached SCSI 1-5
Serial attached SCSI (SAS) 1-5
configuration 3-27
parts list 9-1 types B-13
serial number label 1-4
passwords Web User Interface 4-29
server attachment 3-13
changing 4-12, 4-21 troubleshooting 6-1
servers, supported 1-12
Web User Interface 2-5, A-1
service
performance R/W test drive
attaching RID tag 8-18
diagnostics 4-14
physical specifications 1-10
service mode U
Operator Panel 4-13 Ultrium tape drives 1-8
power consumption, electrical
servicing library unloading drives
supply 1-10
operator interventions 4-33 Operator Panel 4-6
power cords 9-2
Web User Interface 4-32 Web User Interface 4-20
connecting 3-14
SNMP unlocking I/O Station
power management, tape drive 1-8
messaging 1-7 Operator Panel 4-4
power supply A-9
SNMP notifications unlocking magazines
power socket 1-5
configuration 3-27 Operator Panel 4-5
power switch 1-5
Web User Interface 4-29 updating firmware
powering down the library 4-7
software, supported 1-12 Web User Interface 4-36
preparing to ship
sound user accounts
Operator Panel 4-7
Operator Panel 4-12 configuration 3-29
problem diagnosis 6-3

Index X-3
user accounts (continued) Web User Interface (continued)
Web User Interface 4-21 top menu 4-15
user interface unloading drives 4-20
Operator Panel 2-1 updating firmware 4-36
Web User Interface 2-1 user accounts 4-21
user privileges, Web User Interface 2-8, user privileges 2-8, A-3
A-3 viewing library logs 4-33
viewing settings 4-16
viewing trace data 4-35
V weight of library 1-10
width of library 1-10
verifying library, diagnostics 3-35
WORM cartridges 5-3
viewing Accessor statistics 4-38
viewing communications
information 4-3
viewing hardware attributes 4-4
viewing library logs
Web User Interface 4-33
viewing settings
Operator Panel 4-3
Web User Interface 4-16
vital product data A-9
voltage, electrical supply 1-10

W
Web User Interface 2-5, 4-21, A-1
Accessor statistic 4-38
account types 2-6, A-2
active slots 4-23
application managed encryption 4-26
auto cleaning 4-22
cleaning drives 4-20
configuring library 3-17
display elements 2-6, A-3
downloading drive logs 4-35
downloading library logs 4-36
e-mail notifications 4-28
encryption policy 4-27
encryption settings 4-25
error messages B-11
gateway 3-22
I/O Station 4-22, 4-23
inventory 4-21
IPv6 prefix length 3-22
library managed encryption 4-26
library map 4-16
library settings 4-22
library state 4-20
link speed (ethernet) 4-24
login 2-5, 3-17, A-1
manus A-3
menus 2-6
moving cartridges 4-19
network settings 4-24
notification settings 4-28, 4-29
online/offline 4-20
operating procedures 4-1
passwords 2-5, A-1
resetting drive 4-36
resetting library 4-36
saving/restoring configuration 4-30
servicing library 4-32
SNMP notifications 4-29
system managed encryption 4-26
system summary 4-16
TCP/IP 4-24

X-4 IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Readers’ Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You
IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader
Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Machine Type 3572

Publication No. GC27-2212-02

We appreciate your comments about this publication. Please comment on specific errors or omissions, accuracy,
organization, subject matter, or completeness of this book. The comments you send should pertain to only the
information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented.

For technical questions and information about products and prices, please contact your IBM branch office, your
IBM business partner, or your authorized remarketer.

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. IBM or any other organizations will only use
the personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form.

Comments:

Thank you for your support.

Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form.
If you would like a response from IBM, please fill in the following information:

Name Address

Company or Organization

Phone No. Email address

 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Readers’ Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You Cut or Fold
GC27-2212-02  Along Line

_ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ _Tape
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please
_ _ _ _ _do
_ _not
_ _ staple
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ Tape
______

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

International Business Machines Corporation

Information Development
Department GZW
9000 South Rita Road
Tucson, AZ U.S.A. 85744-0001

_________________________________________________________________________________________
Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape

Cut or Fold
GC27-2212-02 Along Line


Part Number: 46X8473

Printed in USA

(1P) P/N: 46X8473

GC27-2212-02